MAC Pt. 240
SCHOOL BUS SPECIFICATIONS 2026-2027
Cite as Miss. Admin. Code Pt. 240
SCHOOL BUS SPECIFICATIONS 2026-2027
Standards effective with all new school buses purchased after July 1, 2026
Dr. Lance Evans
State Superintendent of Education
Dr. Paula A. Vanderford
Chief Accountability Officer
Office of Accountability
Mr. Brian McGairty
Bureau Director
Office of Safe and Orderly Schools
Mr. Jonathan Tillman, Sr.
Pupil Transportation Administrator
Division of Pupil Transportation
Miss. Admin. Code Title 7: Part 240: Minimum Bus Specifications
GENERAL PROVISIONS
The school bus specifications and minimum standards contained herein apply to all school
transportation vehicles purchased by any public-school districts of Mississippi effective the
date of this document. No school district has authority under state laws and Mississippi
Board of Education regulations to purchase or use any equipment except the type
approved by the Mississippi Board of Education. All public-school buses owned,
operated, rented, leased, and contracted for any public-school board used to transport
children to and from school or school related-events must meet or exceed the minimum
requirements of these specifications, meet all applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS), and meet or exceed the 2025 National School Bus Transportation
Specifications and Procedures, except when in conflict with the requirements herein. In
such cases, the requirements specified in this document shall prevail.
Federal regulations require that all vehicles manufactured and sold for the purpose of
transporting school children meet applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. It
is the responsibility of the manufacturer and seller to ensure all school buses are certified
according to the standards. Each vehicle shall be properly serviced prior to being delivered
to the school district.
Any reference to "or equal" means that manufacturers of the chassis or body (or complete
bus) for which a bid is submitted shall have the authority to determine equal quality of parts
and components to be considered.
A representative of the Division of Pupil Transportation, Mississippi Department of Education,
Jackson, Mississippi, shall have the privilege of visiting school bus manufacturing plants
of successful bidders for the purpose of inspecting school bus chassis, school bus bodies,
or combinations thereof, both during construction and after completion for delivery to
Mississippi school districts. Under unusual circumstances and with adequate justification,
exceptions to these specifications may be granted by the Division of Pupil Transportation.
In the event of a conflict between the requirements of an applicable Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard, as referred to in this section, and the Mississippi minimum specifications,
the requirements of the FMVSS shall control. School buses not meeting Mississippi
School Bus minimum specifications will not be certified by the Mississippi Department of
Education.
References to Standards in the School Bus Manufacturers Technical Committee (SBMTC)
and Standards in the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) will be throughout the
document.
ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT
Mississippi School Bus Regulations and Specifications consists of the following distinct
sections: School Bus Body and Chassis Specifications, Specially Equipped School Bus
Specifications, Pupil Transportation Service Vehicles, Used School Buses, Multifunctional
School Activity Bus, Alternative Power Specifications, Equipment for the Transportation
of Pre-School Children, and School Bus Inspection Program.
This document is designed to provide timely, clear instructions to school districts, school
bus owner/operators, private contractors, manufacturers and vendors, and service
personnel regarding Mississippi's school bus adopted specifications for school buses and
related equipment and for standards and procedures to be incorporated in vehicle and
related equipment inspections, replacements, and repairs.
With respect to specifications for school buses and related equipment, after each
National Congress on School Transportation publishes its adopted changes in the
National
School
Transportation
Specifications
and
Procedures
(available
at
https://www.nasdpts.org/NSTSP-Documents) or distributes interim addenda to that
document, the Mississippi Department of Education may review the recommendations
and revise the Mississippi School Bus Specifications accordingly.
Revisions in Mississippi statutes and/or the Mississippi Department of Education
regulations will be published as amendments to this document. Compliance shall become
effective as stated at the time of publication, or as otherwise specified by statute or other
official document.
GUIDING PRINCIPLES
A. Information published in this document is intended to keep interested parties apprised
of statutory requirements and other regulations that apply to various conditions of
purchase, ownership, maintenance, inspection and disposal of school buses and
related equipment.
B. The overriding principle for Mississippi's adoption of the National Congress on School
Transportation's
revised
National
School
Transportation
Specifications
and
Procedures is to provide the safest modes of transportation to and from school and
school-related activities for the school children of Mississippi.
C. Specifications for school buses and related equipment are adopted so as to promote
competition among manufacturers to design and construct equipment that is both
reliable and affordable to school districts and independent transportation contractors.
D. Mississippi's specifications for school buses and related equipment are designed to
allow for approval of the use of new inventions and improvements that are consistent
with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS), Mississippi statutes and goals
of safety, security, and efficiency and that have been approved by the Mississippi
Department of Education, Office of Safe and Orderly Schools, Division of Pupil
Transportation.
INTENDED USE
Mississippi Code Ann. § 37-41-57 gives the State Board of Education the authority to
adopt and enforce regulations of the design and operation of all school buses used for
the transportation of school children when owned and operated by any school board or
privately owned and operated under contract with any school board in this state. The
specifications, regulations, and procedures described in this document, therefore, are
intended for use by school district and other entities that have been placed under the
jurisdiction of the Mississippi Department of Education, including private companies that
contract with local education agencies (LEA) to provide school transportation services,
and for use for manufacturers, vendors, and technicians that have specific interests in
school transportation services. The document is made available, also, as a guide for
charter schools and non-public schools to consider when establishing their respective
regulations, specifications, and inspections.
The following terms are used throughout this document to define the applicability of
Mississippi's specifications and inspection procedures for public school districts and
private contractors:
A. SHALL: a mandatory condition. Where certain school bus designs, equipment or
operations are described with the "shall" stipulation, it is mandatory that all school
buses and all school bus operations meet those requirements, as written.
Note: The word "shall" is also used when referring to items that are already adopted
into federal laws, standards or regulations.
B. SHOULD: an advisory condition. Where certain school bus designs, equipment or
operations are described with the word "should," such items are considered to be
advisable usage. In other words, the item is recommended, but not mandatory,
for all school buses or all school bus operations.
C. MAY: a permissive condition. Where certain school bus designs, equipment or
operations are described with the word "may," such items are considered for possible
usage. However, there is no intent that the item be required for all school buses
or all school bus operations.
The vehicle specifications contained herein are intended to apply primarily to new
vehicles, including all types of school buses, as defined under the various types of "school
buses." It should be noted that vehicles with a capacity of ten (10) or fewer persons,
including the driver, cannot be certified as school buses under federal regulations.
Table of Contents
SPECIALLY EQUIPPED SCHOOL BUS SPECIFICATIONS INTRODUCTION . 63
SECUREMENT AND RESTRAINT SYSTEM FOR WHEELCHAIRS AND
EQUIPMENT FOR TRANSPORTATION OF PRE-SCHOOL AGE CHILDREN 84
SALE AND DISPOSAL OF USED PUPIL TRANSPORTATION EQUIPMENT 101
DEFINITIONS OF SCHOOL BUSES
TYPE A
A Type A school bus is a conversion bus constructed utilizing a cutaway front section
vehicle with a left side driver's door designed for carrying more than 10 persons. This
definition includes two classifications: Type A-1, with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) of 14,500 pounds or less; and Type A-2, with a GVWR greater than 14,500
pounds and less than or equal to 21,500 pounds. All Type A buses shall have dual rear
wheels. Operators of 10-14 passenger Type A buses are not required to obtain a
Commercial Driver’s License (CDL). MDE has created a specific Training Curriculum for
these drivers. This is a mode of pupil transportation that may offer flexibility and efficiencies
to local school districts and serve to increase the pool of available drivers and meet the
unique needs of their student body. Drivers of these vehicles will need to obtain a Class-D
Non-CDL to operate these vehicles. Detailed licensing information can be found on the
Mississippi Department of Public Safety, Driver Service Bureau website.
TYPE C
A Type C school bus is constructed utilizing a chassis with a hood and front fender
assembly. The entrance door is behind the front wheels-also known as a conventional
style school bus. This type also includes the cutaway truck chassis or truck chassis with
cab with or without a left side door and with a GVWR greater than 21,500 pounds,
designed for carrying more than ten 10 persons.
TYPE D
A Type D school bus is a body installed upon a chassis, with the engine mounted in the
front, mid bus, or rear with a gross vehicle weight rating of more than 10,000 pounds,
designed for carrying more than ten (10) persons. The engine may be behind the
windshield and beside the driver's seat; it may be at the rear of the bus, behind the rear
wheels; or between the front and rear axles. The entrance door is ahead of the front
wheels. This type is also known as "transit-style school bus."
Front Engine Style
Rear Engine Style
MULTIFUNCTION SCHOOL ACTIVITY BUS (MFSAB)
A Multifunction School Activity Bus (MFSAB) shall mean a school bus whose purposes do
not include transporting students to and from home or school bus stops, "as defined in 49
CFR 571.3." This subcategory of school bus meets all FMVSS for school buses except
the traffic control requirements. MFSAB may be any Type A, C, or D.
SPECIAL NEEDS BUS
A Special Needs School bus shall mean any Type A, C, or D school bus as defined in this
section, which has been modified to transport students requiring the use of a
Wheelchair/Mobility Aid Position or Lift.
TABLE OF TYPE AND CAPACITY
I TYPE(S)
I CAPACITY
I
Type A-I Cutaway Van (Dual Wheels)
10-14, 16 - 20
Type A-II Cutaway Van (Dual Wheels)
16 – 23, 24-30
Type C - Conventional Flat Face Cowl
29-41, 42-59, 60-71, 72-83
Type D - Transit Type Front & Rear Mounted Engine
41-53, 54-65, 66-75, 76-90
SCHOOL BUS BODY AND CHASSIS SPECIFICATIONS
AIR CLEANER
A. A dry element air cleaner shall be provided.
B. All diesel engine air filters shall include a latch-type restriction indicator that retains
the maximum restriction developed during operation of the engine. The indicator
should include a reset control so the indicator can be returned to zero when
desired.
AISLE
All emergency doors shall be accessible by a twelve inch (12") minimum aisle. Aisle shall
be unobstructed at all times by any type of barrier, seat, wheelchair or tiedown, unless a
flip seat is installed and occupied. A flip seat in the unoccupied (up) position shall not
obstruct the twelve inch (12") minimum aisle to any side emergency door.
AXLES
The front and rear axle and suspension systems shall have a gross axle weight rating
(GAWR), at ground commensurate with the respective front and rear weight loads of bus
loaded to the rated passenger capacity.
BACK-UP WARNING ALARM
An automatic audible alarm shall be installed behind the rear axle and shall comply with
the published Backup Alarm Standards (SAE J994b), providing a minimum of 112 dBA,
or shall have a variable volume feature that allows the alarm to vary from 87 dBA to 112
dBA sound level, staying at least 5 dBA above the ambient noise level.
BRAKES:GENERAL
A. The chassis brake system shall conform to the provisions of FMVSS Nos. 105,
Hydraulic and Electric Brake Systems, 106, Brake Hoses, and 121, Air Brake
Systems, as applicable. All buses shall have either a parking pawl in the
transmission or a park brake interlock that requires the service brake to be applied
to allow release of the parking brake.
B. The anti-lock brake system (ABS), provided in accordance with FMVSS No. 105,
Hydraulic and Electric Brake Systems or No. 121, Air Brake Systems, shall provide
wheel speed sensors for each front wheel and for each wheel on at least one rear
axle. The system shall provide anti-lock braking performance for each wheel
equipped with sensors (Four Channel System).
C. All brake systems shall be designed to permit visual inspection of brake lining wear
without removal of any chassis component(s).
D. The brake lines, booster-assist lines, and control cables shall be protected from
excessive heat, vibration and corrosion and installed in a manner that prevents
chafing.
E. The parking brake system for either air or hydraulic service brake systems may be
of a power-assisted design. The power parking brake actuator should be a device
located on the instrument panel within reach of a seated 5th percentile female
driver. As an option, the parking brake may be set by placing the automatic
transmission shift control mechanism in the "park" position.
F. The power-operated parking brake system may be interlocked to the engine key
switch. Once the parking brake has been set and the ignition switch turned to the
"off' position, the parking brake cannot be released until the key switch is turned
back to the "on" position.
G. All Type A, C, and D buses shall include Electronic Stability Control.
BRAKES: HYDRAULIC
Buses using hydraulic-assist brakes shall meet requirements of FMVSS 105.
BRAKES: AIR
A. The air pressure supply system shall include a desiccant-type air dryer installed
according to the manufacturer's recommendations. The air pressure storage tank
system may incorporate an automatic drain valve.
B. The chassis manufacturer shall provide an accessory outlet for air-operated
systems installed by the body manufacturer. This outlet shall include a pressure
protection valve to prevent loss of air pressure in the service brake reservoir.
C. For air brake systems, an air pressure gauge shall be provided in the instrument
panel capable of complying with Commercial Driver's License (CDL) pre-trip
inspection requirements.
D. Air brake systems shall include a system for anti-compounding of the service
brakes and parking brakes.
E. Air brakes shall have both a visible and audible warning device whenever the air
pressure falls below the level where warnings are required under FMVSS No. 121,
Air Brake Systems.
F. All Type D buses 71 and over passenger capacity shall be equipped with air
brakes.
BUMPER (FRONT)
A. School buses shall be equipped with a front bumper.
B. The front bumper on buses of Type A-2 (with GVWR greater than 14,500 pounds),
Type C, and Type D shall be equivalent in strength and durability to pressed steel
channel at least 3/16 inches thick and not less than 8 inches wide (high). It shall
extend beyond the forward-most part of the body, grille, hood and fenders and
shall extend to the outer edges of the fenders at the bumper's top line. Type A
buses having a GVWR of 14,500 pounds or less may be equipped with an OEM-
supplied front bumper. The front bumper shall be of sufficient strength to permit
being pushed by another vehicle on a smooth surface with a 5-degree, (8.7
percent) grade, without permanent distortion. The contact point on the front
bumper is intended to be between the frame rails, with as wide a contact area as
possible. If the front bumper is used for lifting, the contact points shall be under the
bumper attachments to the frame rail brackets unless the manufacturer specifies
different lifting points in the owner's manual. Contact and lifting pressures should
be applied simultaneously at both lifting points.
C. The front bumper, except breakaway bumper ends, shall be of sufficient strength
to permit pushing a vehicle of equal gross vehicle weight, per Section B, without
permanent distortion to the bumper, chassis or body.
D. The bumper shall be designed or reinforced so that it will not deform when the bus
is lifted by a chain that is passed under the bumper (or through the bumper if holes
are provided for this purpose) and attached to both tow hooks/eyes. For the
purpose of meeting this specification, the bus shall be empty and positioned on a
level, hard surface, and both tow hooks/eyes shall share the load equally.
BUMPER (REAR)
A. The bumper on Type A-1 buses shall be a minimum of 8 inches wide (high).
Bumpers on Types A-2, C and D buses shall be a minimum of 9 ½ inches wide
(high). The bumper shall be of sufficient strength to permit being pushed by
another vehicle of similar size and being lifted by the bumper without permanent
distortion.
B. The bumper shall wrap around the back corners of the bus. It shall extend forward
at least 12 inches, measured from the rear-most point of the body at the floor line,
and shall be mounted flush with the sides of the body or protected with an end
panel.
C. The bumper shall be attached to the chassis frame in such a manner that it may
be removed. It shall be braced to resist deformation of the bumper resulting from
impact from the rear or the side. It shall be designed to discourage hitching of rides
by an individual.
D. The bumper shall extend at least one inch beyond the rear-most part of the body
surface, measured at the floor line.
E. The bottom of the rear bumper shall not be more than 30 inches above ground
level.
CAMERA SYSTEM - not brand specific (optional)
School bus camera systems shall be constructed to provide reliability to withstand
extreme hot and cold temperatures, road vibrations, high humidity, and airborne dust/dirt
caused by unpaved roads.
A. Interior
1. Interior camera system shall permit a minimum connection for four cameras.
2. Camera systems shall provide audio and video day/night recording.
3. May be either a hard or solid-state drive recorder system.
4. A dash camera may be installed for exterior traffic monitoring.
5. Cameras may be mounted in the front, side, back, and/or mid-ship of the bus.
If mid-ship, they must be mounted off center and over a seat back. Corners and
sharp edges shall be rounded or covered with a protective material.
6. Recording equipment shall be mounted as not to produce any tripping hazard
if floor mounted.
7. The exterior camera system monitor may be incorporated as part of the interior
rear-view mirror as long as when the monitor is inactive, it does not interfere
with the normal use of the mirror.
8. The camera system hard drive/DVR shall be mounted outside the federal head
impact zone, FMVSS 222 (School Bus Passenger Seating and Crash Protection).
9. Navigational devices, video event recording devices, and crash avoidance
cameras mounted on the interior of the windshield shall be mounted not more than
four inches below the upper edge of the area swept by the windshield wipers or
not more than seven inches above the lower edge of the area swept by the
windshield wipers. The devices shall be mounted outside the school bus driver’s
sightlines to the road, highway signs, highway signals, and students crossing in
front of the bus.
B. Exterior
1. Cameras shall be a color not contrasting to its background and it shall not
interfere with any safety system lettering. Back up cameras are exempt from
the contrasting color requirement. These camera housings shall be black or
school bus yellow.
2. Exterior cameras shall not extend over six inches from the surface of the bus.
3. Exterior cameras shall be mounted as high as possible.
4. Stop arm: Exterior camera may be mounted at or near the stop arm (see letter
C).
5. A back-up camera may be installed to view the area of restricted visibility to the
rear of the bus. If installed:
a. The back-up camera shall only activate when the bus is in reverse.
b. The monitor to view the back-up camera video may be integrated into the
interior review mirror or may be integrated as part of the dashboard.
6. Backup camera shall be used on Type D buses with a rear-engine.
7. Exterior camera system monitors shall not be mounted if it blocks the driver
view in any direction.
8. Exterior camera system monitors shall only activate when the bus is in reverse
for a rear camera or in park for side cameras. For buses without a park position
in the transmission, the monitor shall only activate when the parking brake is
applied. A forward-facing system monitor shall only activate with the red 8-way
light warning system.
9. Exterior camera system monitors shall be automatically controlled without
requiring driver action.
C. Stop Arm Video Monitoring Systems
If a stop arm video monitoring system is installed on a school bus, the following
minimum system requirements shall apply.
1. The system shall produce live digital and recorded video of vehicles being
operated in violation of Nathan’s Law.
2. The system shall produce a recorded image of the license plate.
3. The system shall record the activation status of at least one warning device
(activation of either and/or the red traffic warning lights and the side stop sign)
mounted on the school bus and the time, date, and location of the vehicle when
the image is recorded.
4. The system shall not obscure the lettering of the side of the bus.
5. The system shall not impede or block any emergency exits.
6. Wiring shall not be mounted on the outside of the school bus and shall not be
mounted inside the driver/passenger area.
7. All roof and side mounting locations shall be sealed to ensure no leaks.
8. They system shall have separate wiring from any emergency lights, alarms, etc.
9. All exterior cameras housings shall be painted NSBY.
10. The system shall operate automatically and not require driver activation.
11. Vendor/Manufacturer shall provide documentation to the locality that the system
is properly mounted, and camera(s) are capturing clear video identifying a
moving vehicle.
12. Vendor/Manufacturer shall warranty the complete system for at least 12 months
after the school district accepts documentation of mounting.
13. Exterior camera(s) shall be designed to eliminate movement due to vandalism
and rough roads.
CERTIFICATION
The chassis and body manufacturer(s) shall certify, upon request to the Mississippi
Department of Education, that (their) product(s) meets Mississippi's minimum standards
on items which are not covered by certification requirements of 49 CFR, Part 567:
Certification.
CHILD CHECK SYSTEM
All school buses shall be equipped with a child check system that shall require the driver
to walk through the bus to look for all children before leaving the bus. The driver shall go
to the rear of the bus to deactivate the system.
The child check system shall activate when the eight-way warning lights have been
activated and fully cycled.
Any attempt to exit the bus by opening the entrance door will sound the horn until the
system has been de-activated.
COLLISION MITIGATION SYSTEM (OPTIONAL)
There may be an option for passive and/or active electronic collision mitigation system(s).
COLOR
A.
The school bus body shall be painted national school bus yellow.
B.
The body exterior paint trim, rub rails, bumper, lamp hoods, emergency door arrow,
and lettering shall be black. Electric buses may have blue bumpers. (Exceptions
to school system name can be found under "Identification.")
C.
The roof of the bus shall be painted white not to extend below the drip rails on the
sides of the body.
D.
The chassis and front and rear bumpers shall be black. Body, cowl, hood and
fenders shall be in National School Bus Yellow (NSBY). The flat top surface of
the hood may be non-reflective NSBY.
E.
Wheels may be black, chrome, or national school bus yellow. Electric school buses
may have factory installed aluminum wheels or blue wheels.
F.
The hood grill may be national school bus yellow, chrome, or black. Grill insert
may be black. The original grill color shall not be changed by painting.
G.
Multifunctional School Activity Buses shall be exempt from this requirement. (See
MFSAB specifications)
COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
Each bus shall be equipped with a two-way, voice communication system capable of
providing communication with the operation's base, or at least local 911 operators where
technologically feasible. All school buses that transport individuals with disabilities shall
be equipped with a two-way electronic voice communication system that can be used at
any point on the vehicle's route.
A. The end user shall be responsible for the purchase, installation, and maintenance
of the two-way communication system.
B. CB radio systems and cell phones that are not equipped with two-way capabilities
will not meet this requirement.
C. It is the responsibility of the local school system to comply with this specification.
CONSTRUCTION
Colorado Racking Load Test: All bus manufacturers shall certify that the bus body
construction meets or exceeds all testing standards of the Colorado Racking Load Test.
This certification is to assure adequate shear stiffness and construction strength of the
bus body (See Appendix A).
Kentucky Pole Test: All bus manufacturers shall certify that the bus body construction
meets or exceeds all testing standards of the Kentucky Pole Test (See Appendix B).
Construction of school bus body shall meet all requirements of FMVSS 220 (School Bus
Rollover Protection), 49 CFR § 571.220, and all other applicable federal standards.
Construction shall be of prime commercial quality steel or other material with strength at
least equivalent to all-steel as certified by the bus body manufacturer. All such
construction materials shall be fire resistant. If roof caps are constructed of fiberglass, the
fiberglass must be backed with a steel inner liner to protect the passenger compartment.
Construction shall provide reasonably dustproof and watertight unit.
Bus Body: The roof bows, body posts, strainers, stringers, floor, inner and outer linings,
rub rails and other reinforcements shall be of sufficient strength to support entire weight
of fully loaded vehicle on its top or side if overturned. Bus body as unit shall be designed
and built to provide impact and penetration resistance.
Side Posts and Roof Bows: There shall be a body side post and roof bow fore and aft of
each window opening. This may be a continuous bow or two separate pieces effectively
joined.
Floor: Shall be of prime commercial quality steel of at least 14-gauge or other metal or
other material at least equal in strength to 14-gauge steel. Floor shall be level from front
to back and from side to side except in wheel housing, toe board, and driver’s seat
platform areas. When plywood is used, it shall be of one-half inch exterior B.B. Grade or
equivalent
and
securely
fastened
to
the
existing
steel
floor.
Roof Strainers: Two or more roof strainers or longitudinal members shall be provided to
connect roof bows, to reinforce flattest portion of roof skin, and to space roof bows. These
strainers may be installed between roof bows or applied externally. They shall extend
from windshield header and, when combined with rear emergency doorpost, are to
function as longitudinal members extending from windshield header to rear floor body
cross member. At all points of contact between strainers or longitudinal members and
other structural material, attachment shall be made by means of welding, riveting or
bolting.
Floor Sills: There shall be one main body sill at each side post and two intermediate body
sills on approximately ten-inch centers. All sills shall be of equal height, not to exceed
three inches. All sills shall extend width of body floor except where structural members
or features restrict area. Main body sill shall be equivalent to or heavier than 10-gauge
and each intermediate body sill shall be equivalent to or heavier than 16-gauge, or each
of all sills shall be equivalent to or greater than 14-gauge. All sills shall be permanently
attached to floor. Connections between sides and floor system shall be capable of
distributing loads from vertical posts to all floor sills.
All openings between chassis and passenger-carrying compartment made due to alterations
by body manufacturers shall be sealed.
A cover shall be provided for the opening to the fuel supply container fill pipe or charging port
for battery electric powered school buses.
A moisture and rustproof removable panel shall be provided in the floor for access to the
fuel supply container sender gauge. It shall be designed for prolonged use and adequate
fastening to the floor.
All Type C and D shall meet the requirements of Section A below.
A. Side Intrusion Test: The bus body shall be constructed to withstand an intrusion
force equal to the curb weight of the vehicle or 20,000 pounds, whichever is less.
Each vehicle shall be capable of meeting this requirement when tested in
accordance with the procedures set forth below. The complete body structure, or
a representative seven-body section mockup with seats installed, shall be load-
tested at a location 24 ± 2 inches above the floor line, with a maximum 10-inch
diameter cylinder, 48 inches long, mounted in a horizontal plane.
The cylinder shall be placed as close as practical to the mid-point of the tested
structure, spanning two internal vertical structural members. The cylinder shall be
statically loaded to the required force of curb weight or 20,000 pounds, whichever
is less, in a horizontal plane with the load applied from the exterior toward the
interior of the test structure. When the minimum load has been applied, the
penetration of the loading cylinder into the passenger compartment shall not
exceed 10 inches from its original point of contact. There can be no separation of
lapped panels or construction joints. Punctures, tears or breaks in the external
panels are acceptable but are not permitted on any adjacent interior panel. Body
companies shall certify compliance with this intrusion requirement, and include test
results, as requested.
B. Construction shall be reasonably dust-proof and watertight, so that the bus does
not leak under normal operating conditions.
C. Body joints present in that portion of a Type A school bus body furnished
exclusively by the body manufacturer shall conform to the performance
requirements of FMVSS 221, "School Bus Body Joint Strength." This does not
include the body joints created when body components are attached to
components furnished by the chassis manufacturer.
D. Type A school bus bodies shall be equipped with restraining barriers conforming
to FMVSS 222, "School Bus Passenger Seating-Crash Protection," Sections 5.2
and 5.3.
CROSSING CONTROL ARM
A. All school buses shall be equipped with a crossing control arm mounted on the
right side of the front bumper. When opened, this arm shall extend in a line parallel
to the body side and aligned with the right front wheel.
B. All components of the crossing control arm and all connections shall be
weatherproofed.
C. The crossing control arm shall incorporate system connectors (electrical, vacuum
or air) at the gate and shall be easily removable to allow for towing of the bus.
D. The crossing control arm shall be constructed of non-corrodible or nonferrous
material or shall be treated in accordance with the body sheet metal specification.
E. There shall be no sharp edges or projections that could cause injury or be a hazard
to students. The end of the arm shall be rounded.
F. The crossing control arm shall extend a minimum of 70 inches (measured from the
bumper at the arm assembly attachment point) when in the extended position. The
crossing control arm shall not extend past the end of the bumper when in the
stowed position.
G. The crossing control arm shall extend simultaneously with the stop signal arm(s),
activated by stop signal arm controls.
H. An automatic recycling interrupt switch may be installed for temporarily disabling
the crossing control arm.
I. The assembly shall include a device attached to the bumper near the end of the
arm to automatically retain the arm while in the stowed position. That device shall
not interfere with normal operations of the crossing control arm.
DEFROSTERS
A. Defrosting and defogging equipment shall direct a sufficient flow of heated air onto
the windshield, the window to the left of the driver and the glass in the viewing area
directly to the right of the driver to eliminate frost, fog and snow.
Note: The requirements of this standard do not apply to the exterior surfaces of
double pane storm windows.
B. The defrosting system shall conform to SAE J381, Windshield Defrosting Systems
Test
Procedure
and
Performance
Requirements-Trucks,
Buses,
and
Multipurpose Vehicles.
C. The defroster and defogging system shall be capable of furnishing heated, outside
ambient air, except that the part of the system furnishing additional air to the
windshield, entrance door and stepwell may be the re-circulating air type.
D. Auxiliary fans are not considered defrosting or defogging systems.
E. Portable heaters shall not be used.
DOORS
A. The entrance door shall be under the driver's control, designed to afford easy
release and to provide a positive latching device on manual operating doors to
prevent accidental opening. When a hand lever is used, no part shall come
together that will shear or crush fingers. Manual door controls shall not require
more than 25 pounds of force to operate at any point throughout the range of
operation, as tested on a 10% grade, both uphill and downhill.
B. The primary entrance door shall be located on the right side of the bus, opposite
and within direct view of the driver.
C. The entrance door shall have a minimum horizontal opening of 24 inches and a
minimum vertical opening of 68 inches.
D. The entrance door shall be a split-type door and shall open outward.
E. All entrance door glass shall be approved safety glass. The bottom of each lower
glass panel shall be not more than 10 inches from the top surface of the bottom
step. The top of each upper glass panel when viewed from the interior shall be not
more than 3 inches below the interior door control cover or header pad.
F. Vertical closing edges on entrance doors shall be equipped with flexible materials.
G. All door openings shall be equipped with padding at the top edge of the opening.
Padding shall be at least three inches wide and one inch thick and extend the full
width of the door opening.
H. On power-operated entrance doors, the emergency release valve, switch or device
to release the entrance door must be placed above or to the immediate left or
immediate right of the entrance door and must be clearly labeled. The emergency
release valve, switch or device shall work in the absence of power.
I. If air or electric doors are used, the amber warning lights shall be activated from a
momentary switch. A three-position switch or bezel of contrasting color to the dash,
located on the panel to the right side shall activate the sequence as follows:
1. Position One - door closed; lights off.
2. Position Two - activate red lights, stop arm, and crossing control arm.
3. Position Three - red lights activated, door open, stop arm activated, and
crossing control are activated.
DRIVE SHAFT
The drive shaft shall be protected by a metal guard or guards around the circumference
of the drive shaft to reduce the possibility of its whipping through the floor or dropping to
the ground, if broken.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
A. Alternator (FOR INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES ONLY)
1. All Type A buses with a GVWR of 15,000 pounds or less shall have a
minimum 130-amp alternator. Buses equipped with an electrically powered
wheelchair lift and/or air conditioning shall be equipped with the highest rated
capacity available from the chassis OEM.
2. All buses over 15,000 pounds GVWR shall be equipped with a heavy-duty
truck or bus-type alternator having a minimum output rating of 200 amps or
higher and should produce a minimum current output of 50 percent of the
rating at engine idle speed.
3. All other buses than those described in B1 equipped with an electrically
powered wheelchair lift and/or air conditioning shall have a minimum
alternator output of 240 amps and may be equipped with a device that
advances the engine idle speed when the voltage drops to, or below, a pre-
set level.
4. A belt-driven alternator shall be capable of handling the rated capacity of the
alternator with no detrimental effect on any other driven components. (For
estimating required alternator capacity, see School Bus Manufacturers
Technical Council's publication, "School Bus Technical Reference," available
at http://www.nasdpts.org.)
5. A direct/gear-drive alternator is permissible in lieu of a belt-driven alternator.
B. Low-Voltage Battery
1. The low-voltage storage batteries shall have minimum cold cranking capacity
rating (cold cranking amps) equal to the cranking current required for 30
seconds at 0 degrees Fahrenheit and a minimum reserve capacity rating of
120 minutes at 25 amps. Higher capacities may be required, depending upon
optional equipment and local environmental conditions.
2. The manufacturer shall securely attach the low-voltage battery on a slide-out
or swing- out tray in a closed, vented compartment in the body skirt or chassis
frame so that the battery is accessible for convenient servicing from the
outside. When in the stored position, the tray shall be retained by a securing
mechanism capable of holding the tray [with battery(ies)] in position when
subjected to a 5g load from any direction. The battery compartment door or
cover, if separate from the tray, shall be hinged at the front or top. It shall be
secured by a positive operated latching system or other type fastener. The
door may be an integral part of the battery slide tray. The door or cover must
fit tightly to the body, and not present sharp edges or snagging points. Battery
cables shall meet the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) requirements.
Battery cables shall be of sufficient length to allow the battery tray to fully
extend. Any chassis frame-mounted batteries shall be relocated to a battery
compartment on Type A buses.
3. All low-voltage batteries are to be secured in a sliding tray, or an accessible
service tray except that on van conversion or cutaway front-section chassis,
batteries may be secured in accordance with the manufacturer's standard
configuration. In these cases, the final location of the battery and the
appropriate cable lengths shall be agreed upon mutually by the chassis and
body manufacturers. However, in all cases the battery cable provided with the
chassis shall have sufficient length to allow some slack and shall be of sufficient
gauge to carry the required amperage.
4. Buses with internal combustion engines may be equipped with a low-voltage
battery shut-off switch. The switch is to be placed in a location not readily
accessible to the driver or passengers.
5. Electric buses may have mounted twelve (12) volt batteries in an easily
accessible location under the hood.
6. Buses with a high-voltage battery electric powertrain shall be equipped with a
low-voltage battery shut-off switch. The switch is to be placed in a location not
readily accessible to the driver or passengers.
C. High-voltage battery
1. High-voltage battery assemblies shall be protected according to federal
requirements.
2. High-voltage batteries shall have a main-service disconnect that isolates the
batteries and does not allow high voltage outside the battery pack.
D. Electrical Components
Materials in all electrical components shall contain no mercury.
E. Wiring, Chassis
1. All wiring shall conform to current applicable recommended practices of the
Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE). All wiring shall use color and at least
one other method for identification. The other method shall be either a
number code or name code, and each chassis shall be delivered with a wiring
diagram that illustrates the wiring of the chassis.
2. The chassis manufacturer of an incomplete vehicle shall install a readily
accessible terminal strip or connector on the body side of the cowl or in an
accessible location in the engine compartment of vehicles designed without a
cowl. The strip or connector shall contain the following terminals for the body
connections:
A. Main 100-amp body circuit.
B. Tail lamps.
C. Right turn signal.
D. Left turn signal.
E. Stop lamps.
F. Back-up lamps; and
G. Instrument panel lamps (controlled by dimmer switch).
3. An appropriate identifying diagram (color plus a name or number code) for all
chassis electrical circuits shall be provided to the body manufacturer for
distribution to the end user.
4. Wiring for the headlamp system must be separate from the electronic
controlled body solenoid/module.
F. Wiring, Body
1. All wiring shall conform to current applicable Society of Automotive Engineers
(SAE) recommended practices.
2. All wiring shall have an amperage capacity exceeding the design load by at
least 25%. All wiring splices are to be accessible and noted as splices on the
wiring diagram.
3. A body wiring diagram, sized to be easily read, shall be furnished with each
bus body or affixed to an area convenient to the electrical accessory control
panel.
4. The body power wire shall be attached to a special terminal on the chassis.
5. Each wire passing through metal openings shall be protected by a grommet.
6. Wires not enclosed within the body shall be fastened securely at intervals of
not more than 18 inches. All joints shall be soldered or joined by equally
effective connectors, which shall be water-resistant and corrosion resistant.
7. Wiring shall be arranged in circuits, as required, with each circuit protected by
a fuse breaker or electronic protection device. A system of color and number-
coding shall be used, and an appropriate identifying diagram shall be provided
to the end user, along with the wiring diagram provided by the chassis
manufacturer. The wiring diagrams shall be specific to the bus model supplied
and shall include any changes to wiring made by the body manufacturer.
Chassis wiring diagrams shall be supplied to the end user. The following body
interconnecting circuits shall be color-coded, as noted:
FUNCTION
COLOR
Left Rear Directional Lamp
Yellow
Right Rear Directional Lamp
Dark Green
Stop Lamps
Red
Back-up Lamps
Blue
Tail Lamps
Brown
Ground
White
Ignition Feed, Primary Feed
Black
The color of the cables shall correspond to SAE J1128, Low-Tension
Primary Cable.
8. Wiring shall be arranged in at least six regular circuits, as follows:
a. Head, tail, stop (brake), clearance and instrument panel lamps
b. Step well lamps shall be actuated when the entrance door is open
c. Dome lamps
d. Ignition and emergency door signal
e. Turn signal lamps; and
f. Alternately flashing signal lamps
9. Any of the above combination circuits may be subdivided into additional
independent circuits.
10. Heaters and defrosters shall be wired on an independent circuit.
11. Whenever possible, all other electrical functions (such as sanders and
electric-type windshield wipers) shall be provided with independent and
properly protected circuits.
12. Each body circuit shall be coded by number or letter on a diagram of circuits
and shall be attached to the body in a readily accessible location.
G. Buses may be equipped with a 12-volt power port in the driver's area.
H. There shall be a manual noise suppression switch installed in the control panel.
The switch shall be labeled and alternately colored. This switch shall be an on/off
type that deactivates body equipment that produces noise, including at least the
AM/FM radio, heaters, air conditioners, fans and defrosters. This switch shall not
deactivate safety systems, such as windshield wipers or lighting systems.
I. The entire electrical system of the body shall be designed for the same voltage
as the chassis on which the body is mounted.
ELECTRIC VEHICLE CHARGING PORT
A. The high-voltage batteries shall be equipped with a system that allows the batteries
to be charged via a connection to the local electrical utility grid. This connection shall
be a Combined Charging System (CCS), North American Charging Standard (NACS),
or SAE J1772, compatible with the charging equipment.
B. The charging receptacle/port shall be mounted/located in accordance with the
manufacturer standards. The receptacle shall accommodate the minimum
requirements for Level II AC charging and DC fast charging.
ELECTRIC VEHICLE DC-DC CONVERTER
A. A DC-DC converter shall be provided and deliver a minimum of 200 amps at 12VDC.
B. The converter system shall incorporate a Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) that
disconnects/isolates the high-voltage batteries in the event of a shorted circuit or
water intrusion.
ELECTRIC VEHICLE HIGH-VOLTAGE SYSTEM
High Voltage-Powered Vehicles: Buses utilizing a high voltage propulsion system (60
VDC or 30 VAC) shall comply with the following:
A. The propulsion power source (batteries, fuel cells, etc.) shall be located outside the
passenger compartment.
B. The propulsion power source enclosure shall be constructed to conform to the
power source manufacturer's requirements and recommendations.
C. Wire, cable, and conductor insulation in the High Voltage System shall provide
adequate insulation for the voltage used and for ambient temperatures ranging
from - 15°F to 120°F. All high voltage wiring/cabling shall be covered with bright
orange loom or otherwise labeled as HIGH VOLTAGE. All high voltage circuits
shall provide adequate and automatic protection against electrical overloads
caused by short circuits or other excessive current conditions through the use of
fuses, circuit breakers, and ground fault interruption.
D. Each door, cover, or other panel that affords immediate access to any high voltage
area shall be plainly marked with a hazard warning label which shall read
WARNING-HIGH VOLTAGE or DANGER-HIGH VOLTAGE. This label shall be
located in a highly conspicuous place. All high voltage access areas shall be
equipped with a lock or otherwise secured to prevent unauthorized access.
E. All high voltage circuits shall provide adequate and automatic protection against
electrical overloads caused by short circuits, or other excessive current conditions
through the use of fuses, circuit breakers, and ground fault interruption.
ELECTRIC VEHICLE IGNITION SYSTEM
A. The ignition switch circuit shall be linked to the Battery Management System and shall
prevent the driving of the vehicle while it is connected to an external battering charging
source.
B. The high voltage system shall be designed so that when the ignition switch is off, the high
voltage is disconnected.
ELECTRIC VEHICLE REGENERATIVE BRAKES
In addition to service brake specifications for combustion engine buses, Electric Vehicles (EVs)
shall be equipped with regenerative braking that utilizes the electric driver system in concert with
the service brakes to slow the vehicle and return electrical energy to the battery system.
ELECTRIC VEHICLE SYSTEM PROTECTION
A. As part of the Battery Management System, EVs shall be equipped with an automatic
shutdown to protect system components from damage caused by malfunctions such as
charging/discharging faults, battery overheating, electrical overheating, degraded battery
health, etc.
B. Prior to automatic shutdown, a warning or maintenance indicator shall display in the driver
console to notify the driver in impending shutdown or the need for immediate maintenance
and allow enough time to safely reposition and stop the bus. Gradual derating or
propulsion shall occur prior to complete automatic shutdown.
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
A. Fire Extinguisher
1. The bus shall be equipped with at least one (1) pressurized, dry, chemical fire
extinguisher, complete with hose, to meet Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.,
approval. The extinguisher shall be mounted in a bracket, located in the driver's
compartment and readily accessible to the driver and passengers. A pressure
gauge shall be mounted on the extinguisher so as to be easily read without
moving the extinguisher from its mounted position. The fire extinguisher shall
not be located in the entrance door area.
2. The fire extinguisher
shall be of a type approved by Underwriter
Laboratories, Inc., with a total rating of 2A:10B:C or greater and at least 5
lbs. The operating mechanism shall be sealed with a type of seal which will
not interfere with the use of the fire extinguisher.
3. Fire extinguishers must comply with State Fire Codes
B. First-Aid Kit
1. The bus shall have a removable, moisture-proof and dust-proof first-aid kit in
an accessible place in the driver's compartment. It shall be properly mounted
and identified as a first aid kit. The location for the first aid kit shall be marked.
2. Each kit shall include:
2 - 1" x 2 1/2 yards adhesive tape rolls
24 - sterile gauze pads 3" x 3"
100 - 3/4" x 3" adhesive bandages 8 - 2" bandage compress
10 - 3" bandage compress
2 - 2" x 6' sterile gauze roller bandages
2 - non-sterile triangular bandages approximately 40" x 36" x 54" with 2 safety
pins
3 - sterile gauze pads 36" x 36"
3 - sterile eye pads
1 - round end scissors
1 - pair latex medical examination gloves
1 - mouth-to-mouth airway
C. Body Fluid Clean-up Kit
1. Each bus shall have a removable and moisture proof body fluid clean-up kit
accessible to the driver. It shall be properly mounted and identified as a body
fluid clean-up kit.
2. Each kit shall include:
4 – antiseptic BZK Towelettes
2 – biohazard Bag – w/Tie
4 – gloves, Nitrile
1 – face mask/eye shield
1 – fluid solidifier – minimum 10g
1 – scooper, plastic
1 – scoop bag
4 – paper towels
2 – germicidal wipes
1 – personal protection hair cover
1 – gown
1 – hand sanitizer – minimum - .9g each
D. Warning Devices
Each school bus shall contain at least three (3) reflectorized, triangle road warning
devices that meet the requirements of FMVSS No. 125, Warning Devices. They
shall be mounted in an accessible place.
E. Any piece of emergency equipment may be mounted in an enclosed compartment,
provided the compartment is labeled in not less than one-inch letters, identifying
each piece of equipment contained therein.
EMERGENCY EXITS
Any installed emergency exit shall comply with the design and performance requirements
of FMVSS No. 217, Bus Emergency Exits and Window Retention and Release, applicable to
that type of exit, regardless of whether or not that exit is required by FMVSS No. 217.
A. Emergency Window Requirements
1. The rear emergency window shall have a lifting assistance device that will aid
in lifting and holding the rear emergency window open.
2. Side emergency exit windows, when installed may be vertically hinged on the
forward side of the window. No side emergency exit window will be located
above a stop arm.
B. Emergency Door Requirements
1. The exposed area of the upper panel of emergency doors shall be a minimum
of 400 square inches of approved safety glazing.
2. If installed, all glass panels on emergency doors shall be approved glazing.
3. There shall be no steps leading to an emergency door.
4. There shall be no obstruction higher than ÂĽ inch across the bottom of any
emergency door opening. Fasteners used within the emergency exit opening
shall be free of sharp edges or burrs.
5. Roof Hatches: Using the following standard and conforming to FMVSS 217, a
head form moving at a velocity of 2 in/min, a perpendicular force applied directly
to the center of the hatch lid must exceed 3100 N (700 lb.) before ANY one of the
following conditions can occur:
•
The roof hatch opens (release mechanism fails).
•
The hath deforms such that an opening large enough to admit the
passage of a four-inch sphere is created.
•
The inner surface of the hatch at the center has moved perpendicularly
to the undisturbed surface of the hatch a distance equal to the length of
the smallest chord along the surface of the hatch passing through the
center divided by 4.
C. Emergency Exit Requirements
Types A, C, and D vehicles shall be equipped with a total number of emergency exits
as follows for the indicated capacities of vehicles. Exits required by FMVSS 217 may
be included to comprise the total number of exits specified.
1. Each emergency exit shall comply with FMVSS 217. These emergency exits are
in addition to the rear emergency door or exit.
2. In addition to the audible warning required on emergency doors by FMVSS
217, additional emergency exits may also be equipped with an audible warning
device.
3. Simple release mechanism shall be provided on roof exits, permitting operation
as emergency exits(s), assessable inside and outside the vehicle. Roof exits
shall be installed, hinged toward the front.
4. Roof exits shall provide a "partially open" position along with the full width of
the hatch, adequate to allow air and thereby ventilate the bus.
5. All metallic hardware shall be manufactured from corrosion-resistant materials
such as aluminum, brass or stainless steel, etc. as to prevent corrosion and
possible failure of the opening mechanism.
6. Use Table 1 if the bus contains a rear emergency door or use Table 2 if the
bus contains a rear push-out emergency window AND a left side emergency
door as required by FMVSS No. 217 for school buses without a rear
emergency door.
TABLE 1
BUSES WITH REAR EMERGENCY DOOR
(All Front Engine Buses)
TABLE2
BUSES WITH REAR PUSHOUT WINDOW AND LEFT SIDE
EMERGENCY DOOR
(All Rear Engine Buses)
Shall
Have
And Shall Also Have
Shall
Have
And Shall Also Have
1-42
1-42
I
µ,, 1-42
I>' 1-42
43-78
43-78
43-78
43-78
79-90
79-90
79-90
79-90
D. Emergency Exit Interlock Device Requirements
1. If an emergency exit is equipped with a locking device, the vehicle shall be
incapable of starting when the exit is locked from either the inside or outside of the
bus.
2. If an exit locking device is engaged, and the vehicle’s ignition is in the “on” position,
a continuous warning sound shall be audible at the driver’s seating position and in
the vicinity of the emergency exit.
EV IDENTIFICATION LABEL
A. Each EV school bus shall be identified with a permanent, diamond-shaped label
located on the exterior vertical surface or near-vertical surface on the lower right rear
of the school bus other than on the bumper of the vehicle.
B. The label shall be a minimum of 4.7 inches long x 3.0 inches high.
C. The marking in the label shall consist of a blue colored background, a border, and the
letters “EV,” one inch in height with the lightning bolt in the center.
D. In addition to the location on the right rear, labels shall be affixed to each side of the
school bus, rear of the entrance door and beneath the driver’s window. Example:
E. Battery disconnect label
1. A permanent label with black one-inch letters shall identify the location(s) of the
battery disconnect switch or device.
2. Any instructions may be printed adjacent to the switch or device in letters ½ inch high.
EXHAUST SYSTEM (FOR INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES ONLY)
A. The exhaust pipe, after-treatment system and tailpipe shall be outside the bus
body compartment and shall be attached to the chassis so that any other chassis
component is not damaged.
B. The tailpipe and after-treatment system shall be constructed of a corrosion-
resistant tubing material at least equal in strength and durability to 16-gauge steel
tubing of equal diameter.
C. The tailpipe may be flush with, or shall not extend more than two inches beyond,
the perimeter of the body for side-exit pipe or the bumper for rear-exit pipe. The
exhaust system shall be designed such that exhaust gas will not be trapped
under the body of the bus.
D. The tailpipe shall exit to the left or right of the emergency exit door in the rear of
the vehicle or to the left side of the bus in front of or behind the rear drive axle or
the tailpipe may extend through the bumper. The tailpipe exit location on all Types
A-1 buses may be in accordance with the manufacturer's standards. The tailpipe
shall not exit beneath any fuel filler location, emergency door or lift door.
E. The exhaust system shall be insulated in a manner to prevent any damage to any
fuel system component.
F. The design of the after-treatment systems shall not allow active (non-manual)
regeneration of the particulate filter during the loading and unloading of
passengers. Manual regeneration systems will be designed such that unintentional
operation will not occur.
G. For after treatment systems that require Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) to meet
federally mandated emissions:
1. The composition of Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) must comply with International
Standard ISO 22241-1. Refer to engine manufacturer for any additional DEF
requirements.
2. The DEF supply tank shall be sized to meet a minimum ratio of 3 diesel fills to
1 DEF fill.
FENDERS:FRONT
A. When measured at the fender line, the total spread of the outer edges of front
fenders shall exceed the total spread of front tires when front wheels are in a
straight-ahead position.
B. Front fenders shall be properly braced and shall not require attachment to any part
of the body.
FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS (OPTIONAL)
A. The chassis manufacturer may provide an automatic fire extinguisher system in
the engine compartment.
B. Fire suppression system shall include audio and visual alerts to notify the driver
that the system has been activated.
FLOOR AND FLOOR COVERINGS
A. The floor in the under-seat area, including the tops of the wheel housing, driver's
compartment, and toe board, shall be covered with rubber floor covering or the
equivalent, having a minimum overall thickness of point one eight of an inch (1/8")
and calculated burn rate of 0.1 or less using the test measures, procedure and
formulas in FMVSS 302 Flammability of Interior Materials. The driver's area on all
Type A buses may be manufacturer's standard flooring and floor covering.
B. The floor covering in the aisles shall be ribbed or other raised pattern elastomer
and have a calculated burn rate of 0.1 mm per minute or less using the test
methods, procedures and formulas listed in FMVSS No. 302 Minimum overall
thickness shall be .187 inch measured from tops of ribs.
C. The floor covering must be permanently bonded to the floor and must not crack
when subjected to sudden changes in temperature. Bonding or adhesive material
shall be waterproof and shall be of a type recommended by the manufacturer of the
floor-covering material. All seams must be sealed with a waterproof sealer.
D. On Types C and D buses, the manufacturer shall provide a screw-down plate to
access the fuel tank sending unit that is secured and insulated. The plate shall be
mounted so that access is readily available to repair personnel and so that the floor
covering is not disturbed during the repair process.
FRAME
A. Frame lengths shall be established in accordance with the design criteria for the
complete vehicle.
B. Making holes in top or bottom flanges or side units of the frame and welding to the
frame shall not be permitted except as provided or accepted by the chassis
manufacturer.
C. Frames shall not be modified for the purpose of extending the wheelbase.
D. Any secondary manufacturer that modifies the original chassis frame shall provide
a warranty at least equal to the warranty offered by the original equipment
manufacturer (OEM) and shall certify that the modification and other parts or
equipment affected by the modification shall be free from defects in material and
workmanship under normal use and service intended by the OEM.
E. Monocoque bus chassis are not allowed.
FUEL SYSTEM
A. Fuel tank(s) having a minimum 25-gallon capacity shall be provided by the chassis
manufacturer. Each tank shall be filled from and vented to the outside of the
passenger compartment, and each fuel filler should be placed in a location where
accidental fuel spillage will not drip or drain on any part of the exhaust system.
B. The fuel system shall comply with FMVSS No. 301, Fuel System Integrity.
C. All types of school buses with a design capacity of 53 and larger shall have a fuel
capacity of not less than 60 gallons. Type C and D buses with a design capacity
of 65 and larger may have a 100-gallon tank.
D. Fuel tank(s) may be mounted between the chassis frame rails or outboard of the
frame rails on either the left or right side of the vehicle.
E. The actual draw capacity of each fuel tank shall be a minimum of 83 percent of the
tank capacity.
F. Installation of alternative fuel systems, including fuel tanks and piping from the tank
to the engine, shall comply with all applicable fire codes in effect on the date of
manufacture of the bus.
G. Installation of Liquified Petroleum Gas (LPG) tanks shall comply with National Fire
Protection Association (NFPA) 58, Liquefied Petroleum Gas Code.
H. Installation of Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) containers shall comply with
FMVSS No. 304, Compressed Natural Gas Fuel Container Integrity.
I. The CNG Fuel System shall comply with FMVSS No. 303, Fuel System Integrity
of Compressed Natural Gas Vehicles.
HANDRAILS
A handrail shall be installed on the left and right sides of the stepwell. The handrail shall
be a minimum of 1" diameter and be constructed from corrosion resistant material(s).
The handrails shall assist passengers during entry or exit and shall be designed to
prevent entanglement, as evidenced by the passing of the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) string and nut test.
HEATING SYSTEM, PROVISION FOR
The engine shall be capable of supplying coolant at a temperature of at least 170 degrees
Fahrenheit at the engine coolant thermostat opening. The coolant flow rate shall be 50
pounds per minute at the return end of 30 feet of one inch inside diameter automotive hot
water heater hose. (See SBMTC-001, Standard Code for Testing and Rating Automotive
Bus Hot Water Heating and Ventilating Equipment.)
HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS
A. Heating system
1. The heater shall be hot water combustion type, electric heating element or heat
pump.
2. The front heater shall be of fresh air, or combination fresh air and re- circulating
type.
3. Heater hoses and clamps shall be adequately supported and shielded to
protect hoses against excessive wear due to vibration. Heater lines, cores, and
elements on the interior of the bus shall be shielded to prevent scalding or
burning for the driver or passengers. Heater hoses conform to SAE J20r3, June
2006 E
4. Buses shall have a minimum of two heaters: one front and one rear.
5. Additional heaters may be re-circulating air type.
6. The heating system shall be capable of maintaining bus interior temperatures,
as specified in test procedure SAE J2233.
B. Auxiliary fuel-fired (Optional)
1. Auxiliary fuel-fired heating systems are permitted, provided they comply with
the following:
a.
The auxiliary heating system shall utilize the same type of fuel as specified
for the vehicle engine;
b.
The heater(s) may be direct, hot air-type or may be connected to the engine
coolant system;
c.
An auxiliary heating system, when connected to the engine coolant
system, may be used to preheat the engine coolant or preheat and add
supplementary heat to the heating system;
d.
Auxiliary heating systems must be installed pursuant to the
manufacturer's recommendations and shall not direct exhaust in such a
manner that will endanger bus passengers;
e.
All combustion heaters shall be in compliance with current Federal Motor
Carrier Safety Regulations.
f.
The auxiliary heating system shall require low voltage.
g.
Auxiliary heating systems shall comply with FMVSS No. 301, Fuel System
Integrity, and all other applicable FMVSS, as well as with SAE test
procedures.
2. All forced-air heaters installed by body manufacturers shall bear a name plate
that indicates the heater rating in accordance with Standards is the School Bus
Manufacturers Technical Committee (SBMTC)-001, Standard Code for
Testing and Rating Automotive Bus Hot Water Heating and Ventilating
Equipment. The plate shall be affixed by the heater manufacturer and shall
constitute certification that the heater performance is as shown on the plate.
3. Heater hoses shall be adequately supported to guard against excessive wear
due to vibration. The hoses shall not dangle or rub against the chassis or any
sharp edges and shall not interfere with or restrict the operation of any engine
function. Heater hoses shall conform to SAE J20c, Coolant System Hoses.
Heater lines, cores, and elements on the interior of the bus shall be shielded to
prevent scalding or burning of the driver or passengers.
4. Each hot water system installed by a body manufacturer shall include one
shutoff valve in the pressure line and one shut-off valve in the return line, with
both valves at the engine in an accessible location, except that on Types A and
B buses, the valves may be installed in another accessible location.
5. All heaters of hot water type in the passenger compartment shall be equipped
with a device, installed in the hot water pressure line, which regulates the water
flow to all passenger heaters. The device shall be conveniently operated by the
driver while seated. The driver and passenger heaters may operate
independently of each other for maximum comfort.
6. On hot water type systems, accessible bleeder valves for removing air from the
heater shall be installed in an appropriate place in the return lines of body
company-installed heater.
7. Access panels shall be provided to make heater motors, cores, elements and
fans readily accessible for service. An exterior access panel to the driver's
heater may be provided.
C. Passenger Compartment Air Conditioning
The following specifications are applicable to all types of school buses that shall
be equipped with air conditioning. This section is divided into three parts. Part 1
covers performance specifications; Part 2 covers test conditions and Part 3 covers
other requirements applicable to all buses.
1. Performance Specifications
a. Standard Performance
The installed air conditioning system should cool the interior of the bus from
100 degrees to 80 degrees Fahrenheit, measured at three points (minimum)
located four feet above the floor on the longitudinal centerline of the bus.
The three required points shall be: (1) three feet above the center point of
the horizontal driver seat surface, (2) at the longitudinal midpoint of the
body, and (3) three feet forward of the rear emergency door or, for Type D
rear-engine buses, three feet forward of the end of the aisle. Note for the
Type A vehicles placement of the rear thermocouple should be centered in
the bus over the rear axle. The independent temperature reading of each
temperature probe inside the bus shall be within a range of ± 3 degrees
Fahrenheit of the average temperature at the conclusion of the test.
b. High Performance
The installed air conditioning system should cool the interior of the bus from
100 degrees to 70 degrees Fahrenheit, measured at three points (minimum)
located four feet above the floor on the longitudinal centerline of the bus.
The three required points shall be:
•
three feet above the center point of the horizontal driver seat surface,
•
at the longitudinal midpoint of the body, and (3) three feet forward of
the rear emergency door or, for Type D rear-engine buses,
•
three feet forward of the end of the aisle. Note for the Type A
vehicles placement of the rear thermocouple should be centered in
the bus over the rear axle. The independent temperature reading of
each temperature probe inside the bus shall be within a range of ± 3
degrees Fahrenheit of the average temperature at the conclusion of
the test.
2. Test Conditions
The test conditions under which the above performance standards must be
achieved shall consist of (1) placing the bus in a room (such as a paint booth)
where ambient temperature can be maintained at 100 degrees Fahrenheit; (2)
heat-soaking the bus at 100 degrees Fahrenheit at a point measured two feet
horizontally from the top of the windows on both sides of the bus, with windows
open for two hours; and (3) closing windows, turning on the air conditioner with the
engine running at 1250 ± 50 RPM, and cooling the interior of the bus to 80 degrees
Fahrenheit,
(standard
performance)
or
degrees
Fahrenheit
(high
performance), within 30 minutes while maintaining 100 degrees Fahrenheit
outside temperature.
The manufacturer shall provide test results that show compliance with standard
systems. If the bid specifies, the manufacturer shall provide facilities for the user
or user's representative to confirm that a pilot model of each bus design meets
the above performance requirements.
3. Other Requirements
a. Evaporator cases, lines and ducting (as equipped) shall be designed in such a
manner that all condensation is effectively drained to the exterior of the bus
below the floor level under all conditions of vehicle movement and without
leakage on any interior portion of the bus;
b. Evaporators and ducting systems shall be designed and installed to be free of
projections or sharp edges. Ductwork shall be installed so that exposed edges
face the front of the bus and do not present sharp edges;
c. On school buses equipped with Type-2 seatbelts having anchorages above
the windows, the ducting (if used) shall be placed at a height sufficient to not
obstruct occupant securement anchorages. This clearance shall be provided
along the entire length (except at evaporator locations) of the passenger area
on both sides of the bus interior;
d. The body shall be equipped with insulation, including sidewalls, roof, firewall,
rear, inside body bows and plywood or composite floor insulation to reduce
thermal transfer;
e. All glass (windshield, service and emergency doors, side and rear windows)
shall be equipped with maximum integral tinting allowed by federal, state or
ANSI standards for the respective locations, except that windows rear of the
driver's compartment, if tinted, shall have approximately 28 percent light
transmission;
f. Electrical generating capacity shall be provided to accommodate the
additional electrical demands imposed by the air conditioning system;
g. Roofs shall be painted white to aid in heat dissipation; and
h. Air intake for any evaporator assembly(ies), except for front evaporator of
Type A-1, shall be equipped with replaceable air filter(s) accessible without
disassembly of evaporator case.
i. For all buses (except Type D rear engine transit) equipped with a rear evaporator
assembly, evaporator shall not encroach upon head impact zone but may occupy
an area of less than 26.5 inches from the rear wall and 14 inches from the ceiling.
j. For Type D rear engine transit buses equipped with a rear evaporator over the
davenport, the evaporator assembly may not interfere with rear exit window and
may not extend above the rear seating row.
HINGES
All exterior metal door hinges shall be designed to allow lubrication to be channeled to
the center 75% of each hinge loop without disassembly, unless they are constructed of
stainless steel, brass or non-metallic hinge pins or other designs that prevent corrosion.
HORN
The bus shall be equipped with a horn(s) of standard make with the horn(s) capable of
producing a complex sound in bands of audio frequencies between 250 and 2,000 cycles
per second, and tested in accordance with SAE J377, Hom-Forward Warming- Electric-
Performance, Test, and Application.
IDENTIFICATION
A. The body shall bear the words "SCHOOL BUS" in black letters at least eight (8)
inches high on both front and rear of the body or on signs attached thereto.
Lettering shall be placed as high as possible without impairment of its visibility.
Letters shall conform to "Series B" of Standard Alphabets for Highway Signs.
"SCHOOL BUS" lettering shall have a reflective background, or as an option, may
be illuminated by backlighting. MFSABS are exempt from these requirements.
B. Required lettering and numbering shall include:
1. District, contractor name or cooperative shall be displayed at the beltline in
letters that are a minimum of 5 inches in height.
2. The bus identification number displayed on the sides, on the rear and on the
front shall be black or contrasting unshaded numbers not less than 5 inches
high.
C. Other lettering, numbering or symbols that may be displayed on the exterior of the
bus shall be limited to:
1. Bus identification number on top of the bus, in addition to required numbering
on the sides, rear and front;
2. The location of the battery(ies) identified by the word "BATTERY"
"BATTERIES" or “12V BATTERIES” on the battery compartment door in two-
inch lettering.
3. Symbols or letters not to exceed 64 square inches of total display near the
entrance door, displaying information for identification by the students of the
bus or route served.
4. Manufacturer, dealer or school identification or logos.
5. Symbols identifying the bus as equipped for or transporting students with
special needs as noted in SPECIALLY EQUIPPED SCHOOL BUS
SPECIFICATIONS.
6. Electronic warning sign or lettering on the rear of the bus relating to school bus
flashing signal lamps.
7. Lettering relating to railroad stop procedures; and
8. Identification of fuel type in 1-inch lettering adjacent to the fuel filler opening.
9. Manufacturer's identification of the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) compartment,
if applicable.
10. Identification of charging port on a Battery-Electric Bus in one-inch lettering
adjacent to the port location.
D. Only signs and lettering approved by state law, regulation, or authority shall appear
on the bus.
INSIDE HEIGHT
The inside body height shall be seventy-two inches (72") or more, measured metal to
metal, at any point on longitudinal centerline from the front vertical bow to the rear vertical
bow. The inside body height of Type A-1 buses shall be sixty-two inches (62") or more.
Inside height measurement does not apply to air conditioning equipment.
INSTRUMENTS AND INSTRUMENT PANEL
A. The chassis shall be equipped with the instruments and gauges listed below:
Note: Telltale warning lamps in lieu of gauges are not acceptable, except as noted.
1. Speedometer;
2. Odometer that can be read without using a key and that will give accrued
mileage (to seven digits), including tenths of miles, unless tenths of miles are
registered on a trip odometer.
3. Tachometer (internal combustion engines only);
Note: For Type C and D buses, a tachometer shall be installed so as to be visible
to the driver while seated in a normal driving position.
4. Voltmeter (low voltage);
5. Oil pressure gauge (internal combustion engines only);
6. Water temperature gauge;
7. Fuel gauge (internal combustion engines only);
8. DEF gauge (if quipped).
9. High beam headlamp indicator.
10. Brake air pressure gauge (air brakes), brake indicator lamp (vacuum/hydraulic
brakes), or brake indicator lamp (hydraulic/hydraulic).
11. Turn signal indicator; and
12. Glow-plug indicator lamp, where appropriate;
13. High-Voltage battery state of charge (electric bus only);
14. Motor Temp (electric bus only);
15. Battery available range in miles (electric bus only);
16. Battery discharge and regeneration rate (electric bus only); and
17. Battery temperature (electric bus only).
B. All instruments shall be easily accessible for maintenance and repair.
C. The instruments and gauges shall be mounted on the instrument panel so that
each is clearly visible to the driver while seated in a normal driving position.
D. Instruments and controls must be illuminated as required by FMVSS No. 101,
Controls and Displays.
E. Multi-Function Gauge (MFG)
1. The driver must be able to manually select any displayable function of the
gauge on a MFG, whenever desired.
2. Whenever an out-of-limits condition that would be displayed on one or more
functions of a MFG occurs, the MFG controller should automatically display
this condition on the instrument cluster. This should be in the form of an
illuminated telltale warning lamp, as well as having the MFG automatically
display the out- of-limits indications. If two or more functions displayed on the
MFG go out of limits simultaneously, then the MFG should sequence
automatically between those functions continuously until the condition(s) are
corrected.
3. The use of a MFG does not relieve the need for audible warning devices, where
required.
INSULATION
A. Thermal insulation shall be fire-resistant, UL approved, with minimum R-value of
5.5. Insulation shall be installed to prevent sagging.
B. Floor insulation shall be five-ply softwood plywood, nominal Âľ-inch thickness and
shall be equal to or exceed properties of the exterior-type, C-D Grade, as specified
in the standard issued by U.S. Department of Commerce. When plywood is used,
all exposed edges shall be sealed. Type A-1 buses may be equipped with nominal
½-inch-thick plywood or equivalent material meeting the above requirements.
Equivalent material may be used to replace plywood, provided it has equal or
greater insulation R-value, sound abatement, deterioration-resistant and moisture-
resistant properties.
INTERIOR
A. The interior of the bus shall be free of all unnecessary projections, which include
luggage racks and attendant handrails, to minimize the potential for injury. This
specification requires inner lining on ceilings and walls. If the ceiling is constructed
with lap joints, the forward panel shall be lapped by rear panel and exposed edges
shall be beaded, hemmed, flanged or otherwise treated to minimize sharp edges.
Buses may be equipped with a storage compartment for tools, tire chains and/or
tow chains. (See BUS BODY AND BODY SPECIFICATIONS, Storage
Compartment.)
B. Interior overhead storage compartments may be provided if they meet the following
criteria:
1. Head protection requirements of FMVSS No. 222, School Bus Passenger
Seating and Crash Protection, where applicable
2. Be Completely enclosed and equipped with latching door (both door and latch
sufficient to withstand a pushing force of 50 pounds applied at the inside center
of the door)
3. Have all corners and edges rounded with a minimum radius of one inch or be
padded equivalent to door header padding
4. Be Attached to the bus sufficiently to withstand a force equal to 20 times the
maximum rated capacity of the compartment; and
5. Have no protrusions greater than ÂĽ inch.
C. The driver's area forward of the foremost padded barriers will permit the mounting
of required safety equipment and vehicle operation equipment.
D. Every school bus shall be constructed so that the noise level at the ear of the
occupant nearest to the primary vehicle noise source shall not exceed 85 dBA
when tested according to the procedure described in the National School
Transportation Specifications and Procedures.
LAMPS AND SIGNALS
A. Interior lamps which illuminate the aisle and the stepwell shall be provided. The
stepwell lamp shall be illuminated by an entrance door-operated switch, to
illuminate only when headlamps and clearance lamps are on and the entrance
door is open.
B. Body instrument panel lamps may be controlled by an independent dimmer switch
or may be controlled by the dimmer that operates the gauge lighting.
C. School bus alternately flashing signal lamps shall be provided, as described by MS
Code 63-7-23. MFSABs are exempt from this requirement.
1. The bus shall be equipped with two red lamps at the rear of the vehicle and
two red lamps at the front of the vehicle.
2. In addition to the four red lamps described above, four amber lamps shall be
installed so that one amber lamp is located near each red signal lamp, at the
same level, but closer to the vertical centerline of the bus. The system of red
and amber signal lamps shall be wired so that amber lamps are energized
manually. The red lamps are automatically energized, and amber lamps are
automatically de-energized when stop signal arms and the crossing control arm
are extended or when the bus entrance door is opened.
The above-mentioned activation sequence can be accomplished with either a
"sequential operation" or a "non-sequential operation" warning lamp system.
While each of the systems can be configured to include components such as a
master switch, amber activation switch, interrupt switch, etc., the presence (or
absence) of these components does not affect the classification of the system as
either sequential or non-sequential. Both sequential and nonsequential systems
can be configured with a multitude of switch combinations to provide a unique
system meeting specific user requirements. An amber pilot lamp and a red pilot
lamp shall be installed adjacent to the driver controls for the flashing signal lamp
to indicate to the driver which lamp system is activated.
3. If air or electric doors are used, the amber lights shall be activated from a
momentary switch. A three-position switch shall activate the sequence as
follows:
a. Position one-Door closed; lights off.
b. Position two-Activate red lights, stop arm and crossing control arm.
c. Position three-Red lights activated, door open, stop arm activated and
crossing control arm activated.
4. Background color may be NSBY or glossy black.
5. Red lamps shall flash at any time the stop signal arm is extended.
6. All flashers for alternately flashing red and amber signal lamps shall be
enclosed in the body in a readily accessible location.
D. Turn signal and stop/tail lamps
1. The bus body shall be equipped with amber rear turn signal lamps that are at
least seven inches in diameter or, if a shape other than round, a minimum 38
square inches of illuminated area and shall meet FMVSS No. 108, Lamps,
Reflective Devices, and Associated Equipment. These signal lamps must be
connected to the chassis hazard warning switch to cause simultaneous flashing
of turn signal lamps when needed as a vehicular traffic hazard warning. Turn
signal lamps are to be placed as wide apart as practical and their horizontal
centerline shall be a maximum of 12 inches below the rear window.
2. Buses shall be equipped with amber side-mounted turn signal lamps. The turn
signal lamp on the left side shall be mounted rearward of the stop signal arm
and the turn signal lamp on the right side shall be mounted rearward of the
entrance door.
3. Buses shall be equipped with four combination red stop/tail lamps.
a. Two combination lamps with a minimum diameter of seven inches, or if a
shape other than round, a minimum 38 square inches of illuminated area
shall be mounted on the rear of the bus just inside the turn signal lamps
b. Two combination lamps with a minimum diameter of four inches, or if a
shape other than round, a minimum of 12 square inches of illuminated
area, shall be placed on the rear of the body between the beltline and the
floor line. The rear license plate lamp may be combined with one lower tail
lamp. Stop lamps shall be activated by the service brakes and shall emit
a steady light when illuminated.
E. On buses equipped with a monitor for the front and rear lamps of the school bus,
the monitor shall be mounted in full view of the driver. If the full circuit current
passes through the monitor, each circuit shall be protected against any short circuit
or intermittent shorts by a fuse circuit breaker, or electronic protection device.
F. A white flashing strobe lamp shall be installed on the roof of a school bus at a
location not closer than 12 inches or more than 6 feet from the rear of the roof
edge. However, if the bus is equipped with a roof hatch or other roof mounted
equipment falling within the above-mentioned measurements, the strobe lamp
may be located directly behind that equipment. The lamp shall have a single clear
lens emitting light 360 degrees around its vertical axis, meeting the requirements
of SAE J845. It may not extend above the roof more than the maximum legal
height. A manual switch and a pilot lamp shall be included to indicate when the
lamp is in operation. Optionally, the strobe lamp may be wired to activate with the
amber alternately flashing signal lamps, continuing through the full loading or
unloading cycle, and may be equipped with an override switch to allow activation of
the strobe at any time for use in inclement weather.
G. The bus body shall be equipped with two white rear backup lamps that are at least
four inches in diameter or, if a shape other than round, a minimum of 12 square
inches of illuminated area, and shall meet FMVSS No. 108. If backup lamps are
placed on the same horizontal line as the brake lamps and turn signal lamps, they
shall be to the inside.
1. Optional Additional Backup Lights shall be an additional lighting system behind
the rear axle. The system shall be white, LED wired to the backup light circuit.
The system shall be skirt mounted and illuminate a rectangular area on both sides
of the vehicle beginning 29 inches aft of center point of the rear axle. This area
shall extend outward from the vehicle sides 24 inches and rearward 30 inches
with no point within this area having illumination of less than 3-foot candles as
tested on a bare concrete surface. Must be OEM installed by the manufacturer.
H. A daytime-running-lamps (DRL) system shall be provided.
I. LED lighting shall be used in all exterior body lamps and signals. Eight-way
loading/unloading lights and stop arm shall be strobe- type LED. Any light not
integrated with the manufacturer’s headlamp shall be LED. However, Generation
II type (80 mA) shall be the minimum brightness when used in stop arm and
alternating strobing signal lamp applications.
J. Exterior Light for Loading Zoan (optional) – If equipped, an exterior lamp or lamps to
illuminate an area on the right side of the bus shall:
1. Project white light;
2. Have the illumination of the area tested for compliance with the entrance door and
all windows closed, to produce a minimum illumination of 10 lux when measured
at each point on the grid, as indicated in Figure 6, at a height of 0.5m (1.6 ft) and
1.0 m (3.3 ft) above the ground, with the light meter positioned so that it measures
incident light on a plane oriented perpendicular to the observation direction, either
from the eye point of the driver or the mirror so that the driver could observe that
location;
3. Direct its light in a manner that prevents the light from shining directly into the
right-side rear-view mirror and crossover mirror;
4. If not disabled by the noise suppression switch, turn on when the door is opened
and when the ignition power is on;
5. Turn off approximately five seconds after the door has closed.
a. An additional switch or other means may be installed to allow the driver to
temporarily de-activate the operation of the exit lamp(s).
METAL TREATMENT
A. All metal except high-grade stainless steel or aluminum used in construction of the
bus body shall be zinc-coated or aluminum-coated or treated to prevent corrosion.
This includes but is/not limited to such items as structural members, inside and
outside panels, door panels and floor sills. Excluded are such items as door
handles, grab handles, interior decorative parts and other interior plated parts.
B. All metal parts that will be painted, in addition to the above requirements, shall be
chemically cleaned, etched, zinc phosphate-coated and zinc chromate- or epoxy-
primed to improve paint adhesion. This includes, but is not limited to, such items
as crossing control arm and stop arm.
C. In providing for these requirements, particular attention shall be given to lapped
surfaces, welded connections of structural members, cut edges on punched or
drilled hole areas in sheet metal, closed or box sections, unvented or undrained
areas and surfaces subjected to abrasion during vehicle operation.
D. As evidence that the above requirements have been met, samples of materials
and sections used in the construction of the bus body shall be subjected to a cyclic
corrosion testing as outlined in SAE J1563.
MIRRORS
A. The interior glass mirror shall be either laminated or tempered and shall have
rounded corners and protected edges. Mirrors shall be 6 x 16 inches minimum for
Type A buses and be 6 x 30 inches minimum for Types C and D buses.
B. Each school bus shall be equipped with exterior mirrors meeting the requirements
of FMVSS No. 111, Rearview Mirrors. The right-side rear-view mirror shall not be
obscured by the unwiped portion of the windshield. Mirrors shall be easily
adjustable, but shall be rigidly braced, so as to reduce vibration.
C. Heated external mirrors may be used.
D. Remote control external rear view mirrors may be used.
E. LED flashing lights integral to the cross-view mirrors may be used.
MOBILE DATA DEVICE (MDD – OPTIONAL)
A. If equipped, the Mobile Data Device (MDD) shall be mounted in an area that shall not
block the driver’s field of view through the windshield. The MDD shall not block the
view of/or access to any gauges, mirrors, indicator lights, or safety control.
B. The MDD shall be securely mounted as to not be a snagging hazard in the student-
loading area of the service door.
C. Audio and/or visual turn-by-turn instructions from the MDD system are allowed while
the bus is being operated. Audible directions shall not use the speakers within the
passenger compartment.
D. While the bus is in motion, audio and visual instructions on the MDD may remain
functional, but operational and tactile functions shall be disabled.
MOUNTING
A. The rear body crossmember shall be supported by the chassis frame. Except
where chassis components interfere, the bus body shall be attached to the chassis
frame at each main floor sill in such a manner as to prevent shifting or separation of
the body from the chassis under severe operating conditions.
B. Isolators shall be installed at all contact points between the body and the chassis
frame on Types A-2, C and D buses, and shall be secured by a positive means to
the chassis frame or body to prevent shifting, separation, or displacement of the
isolators under severe operating conditions.
MUD GUARDS (MUD FLAPS)
Mud guards shall be rubber and meet requirements of Mississippi Code Ann.§ 63-7-73.
Mud guards shall be at least the width of the vehicle's tires.
NOISE SUPRESSION SWITCH
A manual noise suppression switch shall be installed in the control panel. This switch or
switch background shall be red or yellow and labeled. This switch shall be an on/off-type
(not momentary) that deactivates all body equipment that produces noise including at
least the AM/FM radio, heaters, air conditioners, fans, and defrosters. This switch shall
not deactivate safety systems such as windshield wipers, lighting or warning systems.
OIL FILTER
An oil filter with a replaceable element shall be provided and connected by flexible oil
lines if it is not a built-in or an engine-mounted design. The oil filter shall have a capacity
in accordance with the engine manufacturer's recommendation.
OPENINGS
All openings in the floorboard or firewall between the chassis and the passenger
compartment (e.g., for gearshift selector and parking brakes lever) shall be sealed.
OVERALL LENGTH
The overall length of the bus shall not exceed forty-five feet (45'), excluding accessories.
OVERALL WIDTH
The overall width of the bus shall not exceed one hundred two inches (102"), excluding
accessories.
PASSENGER LOAD
A. Actual gross vehicle weight (GVW) is the sum of the chassis weight plus the body
weight, plus the driver's weight, plus total seated student weight. For purposes of
calculation, the driver's weight is 150 pounds, and the student weight is 120
pounds per student.
B. Actual GVW shall not exceed the chassis manufacturer's GVWR for the chassis,
nor shall the actual weight carried on any axle exceed the chassis manufacturer's
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM (Optional)
A. Buses may be equipped with an AM/FM/audio and/or public address system
having interior and exterior speakers. Interior speakers shall be flush mounted with
the bulkhead.
B. No internal speakers other than the driver's communication systems may be
installed within four feet of the driver's seat back in its rearmost, upright position.
RETARDER SYSTEM (OPTIONAL)
A retarder system, if used, shall limit the speed of a fully loaded school bus to 19.0 mph
on a 7% grade for 3.6 miles.
RETROREFLECTIVE MATERIAL
A. The front and rear bumper shall be marked diagonally 45 degrees down to the
centerline of the pavement with 2" x ÂĽ" wide strips of non-contrasting retro
reflective material.
B. The rear of the bus body shall be marked with strips of retro reflective National
School Bus Yellow (NSBY) material to outline the perimeter of the back of the bus
using material which conforms to the requirements of FMVSS 571.131 (Table I).
The perimeter marking of rear emergency exits per FMVSS 217 and/or the use of
retro reflective SCHOOL BUS signs partially accomplish the objective of this
requirement. To complete the perimeter marking of the back of the bus, strips of
at least one-inch retro reflective NSBY material, a minimum of one inch and a
maximum of two inches in width, shall be applied horizontally above the rear
windows and above the rear bumper, extending from the rear emergency exit
perimeter marking outward to the left and rear corners of the bus. Vertical strips shall
be applied at the corners connecting these horizontal strips. Multifunctional school
activity buses (MFSABs) shall be exempt from these color requirements.
C. "SCHOOL BUS" signs, if not a lighted design, shall be marked with retro reflective
NSBY material comprising a background for lettering of the front and/or rear
SCHOOL BUS signs.
D. The sides of the bus body shall be marked with retro reflective NSBY material at
least 1 Âľ in width, extending the length of the bus body and located vertically
between the floor line and the belt line.
E. If used, signs placed on the rear of the bus relating to school bus flashing signal
lamps or railroad stop procedures may be retroreflective material, as specified by
each state.
ROAD SPEED CONTROL
When it is desired to accurately control vehicle maximum speed, a vehicle speed limiter
may be utilized.
RUB RAILS
A. There shall be one (1) rub rail located on each side of the bus approximately at the
seat level which shall extend from the rear side of the entrance door completely
around the bus body (except for the emergency door or any maintenance access
door) to a point of curvature near the outside cowl on the left side.
B. There shall be one (1) additional rub rail on each side located 10 inches or less
above the floor line. The rub rail shall cover the same longitudinal span as the
upper rub rail, except at wheel housing, and shall extend only to the longitudinal
tangent of right and left rear corners.
C. Rub rails shall be attached at each body post and all other up-right structural
members.
D. Each rub rails shall be four inches (4") or more in width in finished form, shall be
constructed of 16-gauge steel or suitable material of equivalent strength suitable
to help protect body side panes from damage. Rub rails shall be constructed in
corrugated or ribbed fashion.
E. Rub rails shall be applied outside body or outside body posts. (Pressed-in or snap-
on rub rails do not satisfy this requirement). For Type A-1 vehicles using chassis
manufacturer's body, or for Types A-2, C, and D buses using rear luggage or rear
engine compartment, rub rails need not extend around rear corners.
F. The bottom edge of the body side skirts shall be stiffened by application of a rub
rail, or the edge may be stiffened by providing a flange or other stiffeners.
SEAT AND RESTRAINING BARRIERS
A. Passenger Seating (Capacity and Design)
1. School bus design capacities shall be in accordance with 49 CFR, Part 571.3,
Definitions, and FMVSS No. 222, School Bus Passenger Seating and Crash
Protection.
2. All seats shall have a minimum cushion depth of 15 inches, a seat back height
of 24 inches above the seating reference point and must comply with all other
requirements of FMVSS No. 222.
3. All restraining barriers and passenger seats shall be constructed with materials
that enable them to meet the criteria of the School Bus Seat Upholstery Fire
Block Test.
4. Each seat leg shall be secured to the floor by bolts, washers and nuts in order
to meet the performance requirements of FMVSS No. 222 and FMVSS 210,
as applicable. Seats may be track-mounted in conformance with FMVSS No.
222 and FMVSS 210, as applicable.
5. If track seating is installed, the manufacturer shall supply minimum and
maximum seat spacing dimensions (applicable to the bus) which comply with
FMVSS No. 222. This information shall be on a label permanently affixed to
the bus.
6. All school buses (including Type A) shall be equipped with restraining barriers
which conform to FMVSS No. 222.
7. A flip-up seat may be installed at any side emergency door. If provided, the flip-
up seat shall conform to FMVSS No. 222 and aisle clearance requirements
of FMVSS No. 217, Bus Emergency Exits and Window Retention and
Release. The flip seat shall be free of sharp projections on the underside of
the seat bottom. The underside of the flip-up seat bottoms shall be padded or
contoured to reduce the possibility of clothing being snagged. Flip-up seats
shall be constructed to prevent passenger limbs from becoming entrapped
between the seat back and the seat cushion when the seat is in the upright
position. The seat cushion shall be designed to rise to a vertical position
automatically when it is not occupied.
8. Passenger seat belts may be installed. If seat belt assembles are installed on
school buses, they shall be of the lap/shoulder belt configuration. Seat belt
assemblies shall be installed by the manufacturer or authorized dealer and must
conform to FMVSS 209. All buses equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts or Child
Safety Restraint Systems (which includes integrated seats, for student seating,
shall contain at least 2 seat belt cutters. One belt cutter must be properly secured
in a location within reach of the driver while belted into the driver’s seat. The
additional belt cutter shall be properly secured in a location determined by the
purchaser. Belt cutters shall be durable, designed to eliminate the possibility of
the operator or others being cut during the use, and must have a full handgrip.
B. Pre-School Age Seating
Passenger seats designed to accommodate a child or infant carrier seat shall
comply with FMVSS No. 225, Child Restraint Anchorage Systems. These seats
shall be in compliance with the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's
(NHTSA) "Guideline for the Safe Transportation of Pre-school Age Children in
School Buses."
Note: See A.8, above.
C. Buses shall be equipped with a rated capacity sticker or plate readily visible and displayed
inside the bus. This shall indicate the maximum seating capacity of the bus for
passengers, in addition to the driver. Buses with track seating shall indicate the maximum
seating capacity of passengers, in addition to the driver.
D. Driver Seat
1. The driver's seat supplied by the body manufacturer shall be a high back seat.
The seat back shall be adjustable to 15 degrees minimum, without requiring
the use of tools. The seat shall be equipped with a head restraint to
accommodate a 5th percentile female to a 95th percentile adult male, as defined
in FMVSS No. 208, Occupant Crash Protection.
2. Type A buses may utilize the standard driver's seat provided by the chassis
manufacturer.
E. Driver Restraint System
A Type 2 lap/shoulder belt shall be provided for the driver.
The assembly shall be equipped with an emergency locking retractor for the
continuous belt system. On all buses, except Type A that are equipped with
a standard chassis manufacturer's driver's seat, the lap portion of the belt
system shall be guided or anchored to prevent the driver from sliding
sideways under the belt system. The lap/shoulder belt shall be designed to
allow for easy adjustment in order to fit properly and to effectively protect
drivers varying in size from 5th percentile adult female to 95th percentile adult
male. The belt shall be of a high visibility contrasting color.
F. Each bus shall be equipped with a durable webbing cutter having a full width
handgrip and a protected, replaceable or non-corrodible blade. The required
webbing cutter shall be mounted in a location accessible to the seated driver in an
easily detachable manner.
SHOCK ABSORBERS
The bus shall be equipped with double-action shock absorbers compatible with the
manufacturer's rated axle capacity at each wheel location.
SIDE SKIRTS
School bus body side skirts between the front and rear axles shall extend down to within
two inches plus or minus, of the horizontal line from the center of the front spindle to the
center of the rear axle. The manufacturer may offer optional side skirt lengths that extend
lower than this requirement. This measurement shall apply to a new unloaded school bus
located on a flat, level surface.
SOUND GENERA TOR (ELECTRIC AND HYBRID BUSES ONLY)
A. Electric and Hybrid School Buses shall be equipped with a sound generator to
warn pedestrians of the school bus’s approach. The Sound generator shall
conform to the SBMTC minimum sound requirements for Electric and Hybrid
school buses.
B. The sound generator shall not emit sound while the bus is completely stopped,
with the transmission in neutral or park, and with the parking brake set e.g., while
loading and unloading.
STEERING GEAR
A. The steering gear shall be approved by the chassis manufacturer and designed to
ensure safe and accurate performance when the vehicle is operated with
maximum load and at maximum speed.
B. If external adjustments are required, the steering mechanism shall be accessible
to make adjustments.
C. Changes shall not be made to the steering apparatus which are not approved by
the chassis manufacturer.
D. There shall be a clearance of at least two inches between the steering wheel and
cowl, instrument panel, windshield or any other surface.
E. Power steering is required and shall be of the integral type with integral
components (valves, piston, gear drive, worm shaft, motors, etc.).
F. The steering system shall be designed to provide a means for lubrication of all
wear-points that are not permanently lubricated.
STEPS
A. The first step at the entrance door shall be not less than 10 inches and not more
than 16 inches from the ground when measured from the top surface of the step
to the ground. An auxiliary step may be provided to compensate for the increase in
ground-to-first-step clearance. The auxiliary step is not required to be enclosed.
B. Step risers shall not exceed a height of 10 inches.
Note: When plywood is used on a steel floor or step, the riser height may be
increased by the thickness of the plywood.
C. Steps shall be enclosed to prevent accumulation of ice and snow.
D. Steps shall not protrude beyond the side body line.
STEP TREADS
A. All steps, including the floor line platform area, shall be covered with an elastomer
floor covering having a minimum overall thickness of .0187 inch.
B. The step covering shall be permanently bonded to a durable backing material that
is resistant to corrosion.
C. Steps, including the floor line platform area, shall have a 1 ½-inch nosing that
contrasts in color by at least 70 percent measured in accordance with the
contrasting color specification in 36 CFR, Part 1192, ADA, Accessibility Guidelines
for Transportation Vehicles.
D. Step treads shall have the following characteristics:
1. Abrasion resistance: Step tread material weight loss shall not exceed 0.40
percent, as tested under ASTM D-4060, Standard Test Method for Abrasion
Resistance of Organic Coatings by the Taber Abraser, (CS-17 Wheel, 1000-
gram, 1000 cycle).
2. Weathering resistance: Step treads shall not break, crack, or check after ozone
exposure (seven days at 50 pphm at 40 degrees C) and Weatherometer
exposure (ASTM D-750, Standard Test Method for Rubber Deterioration in
Carbon-Arc Weathering Apparatus, seven days).
3. Flame resistance: Step treads shall have a calculated burn rate of .01 mm per
minute or less using the test methods, procedures and formulas listed in
FMVSS No. 302, Flammability of Interior Materials.
Note: A spray on application type material may be used in lieu of item A. that
meets the requirements of items B. through D. The material shall be applied not
only to the interior surfaces of the service doorstep treads but also to the exterior,
if not covered by undercoating.
STIRRUP STEPS
If the windshield and lamps are not easily accessible from the ground, there may be at
least one folding stirrup step or recessed foothold installed on each side of the front of the
body for easy accessibility for cleaning. There also may be a grab handle installed in
conjunction with the step. Steps are permitted in or on the front bumper in lieu of the
stirrup steps if the windshield and lamps are easily accessible for cleaning from that
position.
STOP ARM SIGNAL
A. The stop signal arm(s) shall comply with the requirements of FMVSS No. 131,
School Bus Pedestrian Safety Devices and may be illuminated. MFSABs are
exempt from these requirements.
B. Buses shall be equipped with one stop arm, air or electrically driven, meeting SAE
J1133 and the following requirements:
1. An additional stop signal arm may be added to all Type C and D school buses.
It shall be installed on the left side of the bus near the rear section of the bus
and shall have one (1) "STOP" emblem facing the rear of the bus when the stop
sign is in the open position (optional).
2. A light lit illuminated "Stop" sign may be installed on the rear emergency door
between the upper and lower glass panels to alert a motorist directly behind
the school bus (optional).
STORAGE COMPARTMENT (OPTIONAL)
A. A storage container for tools, tire chains and/or other equipment may be located
either inside or outside the passenger compartment. If inside, it shall be fastened
to the floor and have a cover with a positive fastening device.
B. If luggage and/or equipment is to be carried on the bus, a compartment of
adequate strength and capacity may be provided. The compartment shall be side
mount under body type with flush mount door and recess handle and may range
from ten (10) to thirty (30) cubic feet in size.
SUN SHIELD
A. Each Type C and D school bus shall have an interior adjustable transparent sun
visor with a finished edge and dimensions not less than 6 inches by 30 inches. It
shall be installed in a position convenient for use by the driver.
B. On all Type A buses, the sun shield shall be manufacturer's standard.
SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. The capacity of springs or suspension assemblies shall be commensurate with the
chassis manufacturer's GVWR.
B. Rear leaf springs shall be of a progressive rate or multi-stage design. Front leaf
springs shall have a stationary eye at one end and shall be protected by a wrapped
leaf, in addition to the main leaf.
THROTTLE
The force required to operate the throttle shall not exceed 16 pounds throughout the full
range of accelerator pedal travel.
TIRE AND RIMS
A. Rims and tires of the proper size and load rating commensurate with the chassis
manufacturer's GVWR shall be provided. The use of multi-piece rims and/or tube-
type tires shall not be permitted on any school bus ordered after December 31,
1995.
B. Dual rear tires shall be provided on Types A, Type C and Type D school buses.
C. All tires on a vehicle shall be of the same size, and the load range of the tires shall
meet or exceed the GVWR, as required by FMVSS No. 120, Tire Selection and
Rims for Vehicles other than Passenger Car.
D. If the vehicle is equipped with a spare tire and rim assembly, it shall be the same
size as those mounted on the vehicle.
E. If a tire carrier is required, it shall be suitably mounted in an accessible location
outside of the passenger compartment.
TOWING ATTACHMENT POINTS
Front and/or rear towing devices (i.e., tow hooks, tow eyes, or other designated towing
attachment points) shall be furnished to assist in the retrieval of buses that are stuck
and/or for towing buses when a wrecker with a "wheel lift" or an "axle lift" is not available
or cannot be applied to the towed vehicle.
A. Towing devices shall be attached to the chassis frame either by the chassis
manufacturer or in accordance with the chassis manufacturer's specifications.
B. Each towing device shall have a strength rating of 13,500 pounds each, for a
combined rating of 27,000 pounds with the force applied in the rearward direction,
parallel to the ground, and parallel to the longitudinal axis of the chassis frame rail.
For pulling and lifting purposes, tow hooks are meant to be used simultaneously.
For pulling, angularity applied to the tow hooks will decrease the capacities of the
tow hooks.
C. The towing devices shall be mounted such that they do not project forward of the
front bumper or rearward of the rear bumper.
Note: Type A buses are exempt from the requirement for front tow hooks or eyes due
to built-in crush zones.
TRACTION ASSISTING DEVICES (OPTIONAL)
A. Where required or used, sanders shall:
1. Be hopper cartridge-valve type;
2. Have a metal hopper with all interior surfaces treated to prevent condensation
of moisture;
3. Have at least 100 pounds (grit) capacity;
4. Have a cover that screws in place on the filler opening of the hopper, thereby,
sealing the unit airtight;
5. Have discharge tubes extending under the fender wheel housing to the front of
each rear wheel;
6. Have non-clogging discharge tubes with slush-proof, non-freezing rubber
nozzles.
7. Be operated by an electric switch with a pilot lamp mounted on the instrument
panel located to be exclusively controlled by the driver.
8. Be equipped with a gauge to indicate that the hopper has reached the one
quarter level (and needs to be refilled); and
9. Be designed to prevent freezing of all activation components and moving parts.
B. Automatic traction chains may be installed.
TRANSMISSION (FOR INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES ONLY)
A. Automatic transmissions shall have no fewer than three forward speeds and one
reverse speed. Mechanical shift selectors shall provide a detent between each
gear position when the gear selector quadrant and shift selector are not steering
column mounted. Automatic transmissions shall be standard for all type school
buses.
B. Automatic transmissions shall have a transmission shifter interlock controlled by
the application of the service brake to prohibit accidental engagement of the
transmission.
TRASH CONTAINER AND HOLDING DEVICE (OPTIONAL)
When requested or used, the trash container shall be secured by a holding device that is
designed to prevent movement and to allow easy removal and replacement. It shall be
installed in an accessible location in the driver's compartment, not obstructing passenger
access to the entrance door.
TURNING RADIUS
A. A chassis with a wheelbase of 264 inches or less shall have a right and left turning
radius of not more than 42 ½ feet, curb-to-curb measurement.
B. A chassis with a wheelbase of 265 inches or more shall have a right and left turning
radius of not more than 44 ½ feet, curb-to-curb measurement.
UNDERCOATING
A. The entire underside of the bus body, including floor sections, cross member and
below floor-line side panels, shall be coated with rust-proofing material for which
the material manufacturer has issued to the bus body manufacturer a notarized
B. certification to the bus body manufacturer that materials meet or exceed all
performance requirements of SAE J1959, Sept. 2003 Edition of the Standard.
C. The undercoating material shall be applied with suitable airless or conventional
spray equipment to the undercoating material manufacturer recommended film
thickness and shall show no evidence of voids in the cured film.
D. The undercoating material shall not cover any exhaust components of the chassis.
VENTILATION
A. Auxiliary Fan(s) shall meet the following requirements:
B. Fan(s) shall be placed in a location where they can be adjusted for maximum
effectiveness and where they do not obstruct the driver's vision to the mirrors or
interfere with the safe operation of the vehicle.
1. Fans shall have six-inch (nominal) diameter.
2. Fan blades shall be enclosed in a protective cage. Each fan shall be controlled
by a separate switch.
C. The bus body shall be equipped with a suitably controlled ventilating system with
capacity sufficient to maintain the proper quantity of air flow under operating
conditions without having to open a window except in extremely warm weather.
D. Static-type, non-closeable exhaust ventilation shall be installed in a low-pressure
area of the roof.
E. Roof hatches designed to provide ventilation in all types of exterior weather
conditions may be provided.
WHEELHOUSING
A. The wheel housing opening shall allow for easy tire removal and service.
B. Wheel housings shall be attached to the floor panels in a manner to prevent any
dust, water or fumes from entering the body. Wheel housings shall be constructed
of 16-gauge (or thicker) steel.
C. The inside height of the wheel housings above the floor line shall not exceed 12
inches.
D. The wheel housings shall provide clearance for installation and use of tire chains
on single or dual (if so equipped) power-driving wheels.
E. No part of a raised wheel housing shall extend into the emergency door opening.
WINDOWS
A. Other than emergency exits designated to comply with FMVSS No. 217, Bus
Emergency Exits and Window Retention and Release, each side window shall
provide an unobstructed opening of at least nine inches high (but not more than
13 inches high) and at least 22 inches wide, obtained by lowering the window. One
window on each side of the bus may be less than 22 inches wide.
B. Optional Tinted and/or frost-free glazing shall be installed in all doors or windows.
C. Windshields shall comply with federal, state and local regulations.
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
A windshield washer system shall be provided.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
A. A windshield wiping system, two speed or variable speed, with an intermittent
feature shall be provided and shall be operated by a single switch.
B. The wipers shall meet the requirements of FMVSS No. 104, Windshield Wiping
and Washing Systems.
SPECIALLY EQUIPPED SCHOOL BUS SPECIFICATIONS INTRODUCTION
Equipping buses to accommodate students with disabilities is dependent upon the needs
of the passengers. While one bus may be fitted with a lift, another may have belts
installed to secure child seats. Buses so equipped are not to be considered a separate
class of school bus, but simply a regular school bus that is equipped for special
accommodations.
The specifications in this section are intended to supplement specifications in the school
bus body and chassis sections. In general, specially equipped buses shall meet all the
requirements of the preceding sections, plus those listed in this section. It is essential to
consider both current and future needs, as well as considering a flexible approach, given
the diverse needs of students with disabilities or health care needs. Long-term
consideration makes it necessary to research all options available. It is prudent to
consider the potential range of students being transported throughout the vehicle’s
lifespan. This forward-thinking approach ensures that the bus remains suitable for
changing student populations over time.
DEFINITION
A specially equipped school bus is any school bus that is designed, equipped and/or
modified to accommodate students with special transportation needs.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Specially equipped school buses shall comply with the National School
Transportation Specifications and Procedures and with the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards (FMVSSs) applicable to their gross vehicle weight rating
(GVWR) category.
B. Specially equipped school buses shall comply with Mississippi specifications as
enumerated in the Bus Body and Chassis Specifications section of this document.
C. Any school bus to be used for the transportation of children who utilize a
wheelchair or other mobile positioning device, or who require life-support
equipment that prohibits use of the regular service entrance, shall be equipped
with a power lift.
AIR CONDITIONING
Special needs buses shall be equipped with air conditioning. Refer to School Bus Body
and Chassis Specifications, for minimum heating and air conditioning standards.
AISLES
All school buses equipped with a power lift shall provide a minimum 30-inch pathway
leading from any wheelchair position to at least one 30 inches wide emergency exit door.
A wheelchair securement position shall never be located directly in front of (blocking) a
power lift door location.
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
A. All school buses that transport individuals with disabilities shall be equipped with
a two-way electronic voice communication system that can be used at any point
on the vehicle's route.
B. Each bus should have a public address system capable of driver communication
with passengers inside and outside the bus.
EVACUATION BLANKET (OPTIONAL)
A minimum of two fire-retardant, evacuation blankets, Tie Tech Evacuation Transporter
Part# 1013, or equal, and a minimum of two storage pouches may be provided on buses
equipped with a lift. The location to secure the evacuation blanket shall be easily
accessible and determined by the purchaser at the time of the bid.
GLAZING
Tinted glazing shall be installed in all doors, windows and windshields consistent with
federal, state and local regulations.
IDENTIFICATION
Specially equipped school buses shall display the International Symbol of Accessibility
below the window line. Such emblems shall be white on blue or black background, shall
not exceed 12 inches square in size and shall be of a high-intensity retroreflective material
meeting the requirements of Federal Highway Administration (FHWA) FP-85, Standard
Specifications for Construction of Roads and Bridges on Federal Highway Projects.
PASSENGER CAPACITY RATING
In determining the passenger capacity of a school bus for purposes other than actual
passenger load (e.g., vehicle classification or various billing/reimbursement models), any
location in a school bus intended for securement of a wheelchair during vehicle operation
shall be regarded as four designated seating positions, and each lift area shall count as
four designated seating positions.
POWER LIFTS
A. The power lift shall be located on the right side of the bus body.
Exception: The lift may be located on the left side of the bus if, and only if, the bus is
only used to deliver students to the left side of one-way streets.
B. Vehicle lift and installation
1. General: Vehicle lifts and installations shall comply with the requirements set
forth in FMVSS 403, Platform Lift Systems for Motor Vehicles, and FMVSS 404,
Platform Lift Installations in Motor Vehicles.
2. Design loads: The design load of the lift shall be at least 800 pounds. Working
parts, such as cables, pulleys and shafts, which can be expected to wear, and
upon which the lift depends for support of the load, shall have a safety factor
of at least six, based on the ultimate strength of the material. Non-working
parts, such as platform, frame and attachment hardware would not be
expected to wear, shall have a safety factor of at least three, based on the
ultimate strength of the material.
3. Lift capacity: The lifting mechanism and platform shall be capable of operating
effectively with a wheelchair and occupant mass of at least 800 pounds.
4. Controls: (See 49 CFR 571. 403, S6.7, Control systems.)
5. Emergency operations: (See 49 CFR 571.403, S6.9, Backup operation.)
6. Power or equipment failures: (See 49 CFR 571.403, S6.2.2, Maximum platform
velocity.)
7. Platform barriers: (See 49 CFR 571. 403, S6.4.7, Wheelchair retention.)
8. Platform surface: (See 49 CFR 571.403, S6.4.2, S6.4.3, Platform
requirements.) (See, also "Wheelchair or Mobility Aid Envelope" figure at the
end of this subsection.)
9. Platform gaps and entrance ramps: (See 49 CFR 571.403, S6.4.4, Gaps,
transitions and openings.)
10. Platform deflection: (See 49 CFR 571. 403, S6.4.5, Platform deflection.)
11. Platform movement: (See 49 CFR 571. 403, S6.2.3, Maximum platform
acceleration.)
12. Boarding direction: The lift shall permit both inboard and outboard facing of
wheelchair and mobility aid users.
13. Handrails: (See 49 CFR 571.403, S6.4.9, Handrails.)
14. Circuit breaker: A resettable circuit breaker shall be installed between the
power source and the lift motor if electrical power is used. It shall be located
as close to the power source as possible, but not within the passenger/driver
compartment.
15. Excessive pressure: (See 49 CFR 571. 403, S6.8, Jacking prevention.)
16. Documentation: The following information shall be provided with each vehicle
equipped with a lift.
a. A phone number where information can be obtained about installation,
repair and parts. (Detailed written instructions and a parts list shall be
available upon request.)
b. Detailed instructions regarding use of the lift shall be readily visible when
the lift door is open, including a diagram showing the proper placement
and positioning of wheelchair/mobility aids on the lift.
c. Training materials: The lift manufacturer shall make training materials
available to ensure the proper use and maintenance of the lift. These may
include instructional videos, classroom curriculum, system test results or
other related materials;
d. Identification and certification: Each lift shall be permanently and legibly
marked or shall incorporate a non-removable label or tag that states it
conforms to all applicable requirements of the current National School
Transportation Specifications and Procedures. In addition, and upon
request of the original titled purchaser, the lift manufacturer or an
authorized representative shall provide a notarized Certificate of
Conformance, either original or photocopied, which states that the lift
system meets all the applicable requirements of the current National
School Transportation Specifications and Procedures.
RESTRAINING DEVICES
A. On power lift-equipped school buses with a GVWR of 10,000 pounds or more, seat
frames may be equipped with attachment points to which belt assemblies can be
attached for use with child safety restraint systems (CSRSs) that comply with
FMVSS No. 213, Child Restraint Systems. Any belt assembly anchorage shall
comply with FMVSS No. 210, Seat Belt Assembly Anchorages.
B. Alternatively, a child restraint anchorage system that complies with FMVSS No.
225, Child Restraint Anchorage Systems, may be installed.
C. Seat belt assemblies, if installed, shall conform to FMVSS No. 209, Seat Belt
Assemblies.
D. Child safety restraint systems shall conform to FMVSS No. 213.
SEATING ARRANGEMENTS
Flexibility in seat spacing to accommodate special devices shall be permitted to meet
passenger requirements. All seating shall meet the requirements of FMVSS No. 222,
School Bus Passenger Seating and Crash Protection.
SECUREMENT AND RESTRAINT SYSTEM FOR WHEELCHAIRS AND WHEELCHAIR-
REGULAR SERVICE ENTRANCE
SEATED OCCUPANTS
For purposes of understanding the various aspects and components of this section, the
term securement and tiedown and the phrases securement system or tiedown system
are used exclusively in reference to the devices that anchor the wheelchair to the vehicle.
The term restraint and the phrase restraint system are used exclusively in reference to
the equipment that is intended to limit the movement of the wheelchair occupant in a
crash or sudden maneuver. The term wheelchair tiedown and occupant restraint system
(WTORS) is used to refer to the total system that secures the wheelchair and restrains
the wheelchair occupant.
A. WTORS-general requirements:
1. The wheelchair tiedown and occupant restraint system installed in specially
equipped school buses shall be designed, installed, and operated for use with
forward-facing wheelchair-seated passengers and shall comply with all
applicable requirements of FMVSS 222, School Bus Passenger Seating and
Crash Protection, and SAE J2249, Wheelchair Tiedown and Occupant
Restraint Systems for Use in Motor Vehicles. An ANSI/RESNA WC18-
compliant WTORS may be specified when transporting a wheelchair that is
fully compliant with WC19 (2012), which includes a crash tested wheelchair-
anchored pelvic belt;
Note: Floor anchors must provide adjustability when transporting all types and
sizes of wheelchairs.
2. Wheelchair securement positions shall be located such that wheelchairs and
their occupants do not block access to the lift door or exits.
3. A device for storage of the WTORS shall be provided. When the system is not
in use, the storage device shall allow for clean storage of the system, shall keep
the system securely contained within the passenger compartment, shall
provide reasonable protection from vandalism and shall enable the system to
be readily accessed for use. The WTORS, including the storage device, shall
meet the flammability standards established in FMVSS No. 302, Flammability
of Interior Materials.
4. The following information shall be provided with each vehicle equipped with
a securement and restraint system:
a. A phone number where information can be obtained about installation,
repair and parts. (Detailed written instructions and a parts list shall be
available upon request.)
b. Detailed instructions regarding use, including a diagram showing the
proper placement of the wheelchair/mobility aids and positioning of
securement devices and occupant restraints, including correct belt
angles.
5. The WTORS manufacturer shall make training materials available to ensure
the proper use and maintenance of the WTORS. These may include
instructional videos, classroom curriculum, system test results or other related
materials.
B. Wheelchair Securement/Tiedown: (See 49 CFR 571.403, S5.4.1, S5.4.2.) Each
wheelchair position in a specially equipped school bus shall have a minimum clear
floor area of 30 inches laterally by 48 inches longitudinally. Additional floor area
may be required for some wheelchairs. Consultation between the user and the
manufacturer is recommended to ensure that adequate area is provided.
C. Occupant restraint system: (See 49 CFR 571.403, S5.4.3, S5.4.4.) If the upper
torso belt anchorage is higher than 44 inches measured from the vehicle floor, an
adjustment device, as part of the occupant restraint system, shall be supplied.
SPECIAL LIGHT
Doorways in which lifts are installed shall be equipped with a special light that provides a
minimum of two foot-candles of illumination measured on the floor of the bus immediately
adjacent to the lift during lift operation. This lighting shall be LED.
SPECIAL SERVICE ENTRANCE
A. Power lift-equipped bodies shall have a special
service
entrance
to
accommodate the power lift.
Note: A special service entrance shall not be required if the lift is designed to
operate within the regular service entrance, is capable of stowing such that the
regular service entrance is not blocked in any way and a person entering or exiting
the bus is not impeded in any way.
B. The special service entrance and door shall be located on the right side of the bus
and shall be designed so as not to obstruct the regular service entrance.
Note: A special service entrance and door may be located on the left side of the
bus only if the bus is used only to deliver students to the left side of one-way
streets and its use is limited to that function.
C. The opening may extend below the floor through the bottom of the body skirt. If
such an opening is used, reinforcements shall be installed at the front and rear of
the floor opening to support the floor and give the same strength as other floor
openings.
D. A drip molding shall be installed above special service entrance to effectively divert
water from the entrance.
E. Door posts and headers at the special service entrance shall be reinforced
sufficiently to provide support and strength equivalent to the areas of the side of
the bus not used for special service entrance.
SPECIAL SERVICE ENTRANCE DOORS
A. A single door or double doors may be used for the special service entrance.
B. A single door shall be hinged to the forward side of the entrance unless this would
obstruct the regular service entrance. If the door is hinged to the rearward side of
the doorway, the door shall utilize a safety mechanism that will prevent the door
from swinging open should the primary door latch fail. If double doors are used,
the system shall be designed to prevent the door(s) from being blown open by the
aerodynamic forces created by the forward motion of the bus, and/or shall
incorporate a safety mechanism to provide secondary protection should the
primary latching mechanism(s) fail.
C. All doors shall have positive fastening devices to hold doors in the "open" position
when the special service entrance is in use.
D. All doors shall be weather sealed.
E. When manually operated dual doors are provided, the rear door shall have at least
a one-point fastening device to the header. The forward-mounted door shall have
at least three one-point fastening devices. One shall be to the header, one to the
floor line of the body, and the other shall be into the rear door. The door and hinge
mechanism shall have strength that is greater than, or equivalent to, the strength
of the emergency exit door.
F. Door materials, panels and structural components shall have strength equivalent
to the conventional service and emergency doors. Color, rub rail extensions,
lettering and other exterior features shall match adjacent sections of the body.
G. Each door shall have windows set in a waterproof manner that are visually similar
in size and location to adjacent non-door windows. Glazing shall be of the same
type and tinting (if applicable) as standard fixed glass in other body locations.
H. Door(s) shall be equipped with a device that will actuate an audible or flashing
signal located in the driver's compartment when door(s) is/are not securely closed,
and the ignition is in the "on" position.
I. A switch shall be installed so that the lift mechanism will not operate when the lift
platform door(s) is closed.
J. Special service entrance doors shall be equipped with padding at the top edge of
the door opening. The padding shall be at least three inches wide and one inch
thick and shall extend the full width of the door opening.
SUPPORT EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES
A. In addition to the webbing cutter required in the SCHOOL BUS BODY AND
CHASSIS section, each specially equipped school bus that is set up to
accommodate wheelchairs or other assistive or restraint devices with webbing
attached shall contain an additional webbing cutter properly secured in a location
to be determined by the purchaser. The webbing cutter shall meet the
requirements listed in the SCHOOL BUS BODY AND CHASSIS section, Seats
and Restraining Barriers.
B. Special equipment or supplies that are used in the bus for mobility assistance,
health support or safety purposes shall meet local, federal and engineering
standards that may apply, including requirements for proper identification.
Equipment that may be used for these purposes includes, but is not limited to:
1. Wheelchairs and other mobile seating devices (See subsection on Securement
and Restraint System for Wheelchairs and Wheelchair-seated Occupants.)
2. Crutches, walkers, canes and other ambulating devices to assist ambulation
3. Medical support equipment: This may include respiratory devices, such as
oxygen bottles (which should be no larger than 38 cubic feet for compressed
gas) or ventilators. Tanks and valves should be located and positioned to
protect them from direct sunlight, bus heater vents or other heat sources. Other
equipment may include intravenous and fluid drainage apparatus.
C. Each specially equipped school bus that is set up to accommodate wheelchairs or
other assistive restraint devices should be equipped with an emergency
evacuation device that is certified and tested to withstand at least a 300-pound
load when used as an emergency stretcher or drag. This evacuation device shall
be properly secured to the bus in a location to be determined by the purchaser.
D. If transporting oxygen, refer to SAE J3043 Equipment Mount Testing: These mounts
may be tested in accordance with the requirement of SAE J3043. (Ambulance
Equipment Mount Device or Systems).
TECHNOLOGY AND EQUIPMENT, NEW
It is the intent of these specifications to accommodate new technologies and equipment
that will better facilitate the transportation of students with special needs. New technology
and equipment are acceptable for use in specially equipped vehicles if:
A. Items do not compromise the effectiveness or integrity of any major safety system.
(Examples of safety systems include, but are not limited to, compartmentalization,
the eight-lamp warning system, emergency exits and the approved color scheme.)
B. Items do not diminish the safety of the bus interior.
C. Items do not create additional risk to students who are boarding or exiting the bus
or are in or near the school bus loading zone.
D. Items do not require undue additional activity and/or responsibility for the driver.
E. Items generally increase efficiency and/or safety of the bus, generally provide for
a safer or more pleasant experience for the occupants and pedestrians in the
vicinity of the bus and/or generally assist the driver and makes his/her many tasks
easier to perform.
PUPIL TRANSPORTATION SERVICE VEHICLES
Pupil transportation service vehicles shall be standard production models and shall be
equipped with adequate springs, axles, tires, and other load carrying components to meet
GVWR requirements. Optional equipment may be purchased for service vehicles
provided they appear as part of the specifications used by the respective school districts
in soliciting bids on service vehicles.
USED SCHOOL BUSES
All used school buses purchased or operated by a local education agency or private
contractor shall meet the Mississippi Minium Standards for School Buses for the year
in which the bus was manufactured.
MULTIFUNCTIONAL SCHOOL ACTIVITY BUS SPECIFICATIONS
DEFINITION:
A Multifunctional School Activity Bus (MFSAB) is a school bus constructed to Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS) and Mississippi Minimum School Bus
Specifications. It must be purchased or leased as a new bus and shall only be used for
extracurricular activities. THESE BUSES SHALL NOT BE USED TO TRANSPORT
STUDENTS TO AND FROM HOME, SCHOOL BUS STOPS, OR BETWEEN
SCHOOLS FOR THE PURPOSE OF ATTENDANCE.
The following exceptions to the Mississippi Minimum Specifications for School Buses for
regular route buses shall be allowed for Multifunction School Activity Buses.
CHILD CHECK SYSTEM
Child check systems are required on all MFSAB.
COLOR:
The local education agency (LEA) with school board approval may determine the color
of the activity bus. The color scheme may utilize any combination of up to THREE
colors. This combination may be in addition to the white roof. The color National School
Bus Yellow (SBMTC-008 Publication) shall not be used as a part of the color scheme.
The local education agency and/or vendors shall submit preliminary color and graphic
schemes to the Mississippi Department of Education, Pupil Transportation Division for
approval prior to the purchase or manufacture of a Multifunctional School Activity Bus
(MFSAB).
IDENTIFICATION:
A. The bus body shall bear the words "ACTIVITY BUS" in a contrasting color at least
8 inches high in the area where "school bus" is normally positioned. Lettering and
numbering shall conform to FMVSS and Mississippi Minimum Specifications and
shall meet reflectivity standards. Bus numbering on this bus may be of a
contrasting color.
B. The name of the school district, or school shall be displayed in at least five-inch
letters on both sides of the bus in the beltline area. If a school system elects to
put the name of the school in the beltline, the school system shall be displayed
on both sides of the bus in the rear skirt area with a minimum of 3" letters. NO
SIGNS shall be applied to any area of the bus including the bumpers. Mascot
logos may be placed on the bus with approval from the Mississippi Department of
Education, Pupil Transportation Division.
C. No signs, logos, or other items that obstruct visibility shall be displayed on the
windows of the bus. No full wraps are allowed, and no decals or modified
wrapping shall cover reflective safety material.
D. Full or modified wrapping of existing regular route school buses purchased to
transport students between home and school as a Multifunction School Activity
Buses are not allowed.
INSPECTIONS:
Inspections by qualified technicians at the LEA shall be performed on all Multifunctional
School Activity Buses (MFSAB) as required by state law and the rules and regulations of
the Mississippi State Board of Education.
LIGHTING AND WARNING DEVICES:
All Multifunctional School Activity Buses (MFSAB) shall meet state and federal
standards for normal school bus lighting and warning device requirements with the
following exceptions:
A. Multifunctional School Activity Buses (MFSAB) shall not be equipped with
alternately flashing amber or red signal lamps used for loading and unloading
students.
B. Multifunctional School Activity Buses (MFSAB) shall not be equipped with stop
arm signals or crossing control arms.
REGULATIONS:
These buses shall be owned by the LEA or leased from private school bus
transportation contractors. All Mississippi laws, rules of the State Board of Education,
and other applicable regulations pertaining to the operation of school buses and
certification of school bus drivers shall apply to Multifunctional School Activity Buses.
SEATING:
Activity seats, which meet FMVSS 222 and 210, may be used in lieu of regular school bus
seats. If activity seats are used, passenger seat belts are optional on Type C and Type D
MFSAB. These seat belt assemblies shall be of the lap/shoulder configuration and shall be
installed by the manufacturer, or authorized dealer, and must conform to FMVSS 209, 210,
222 and 225.
ALTERNATIVE POWER SPECIFICATIONS
INTRODUCTION
This section is designed to be used as an overview of the alternative fuels being utilized
for school transportation. It is not designed to replace current applicable federal, state,
manufacturing or safety specifications that may exceed requirements within this section.
There may be advancements in engineering and improvements in equipment fabrication
methods and operating practices that differ from those specifically called for in this
section. Such deviations or improvements may provide safety and may meet the intent
of, and be compatible with, this section. Entities wishing to purchase alternative fuel
school buses should use this section only as a starting point. More detailed specifications,
including specific design and performance criteria and safety specifications, should be
researched by prospective purchasers of alternative fuel school buses.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Alternative power school buses shall meet all the specifications in this manual and the
specific requirements for the type of alternate power systems listed below:
1. Chassis shall meet all specifications previously mentioned in BUS CHASSIS
SPECIFICATIONS.
2. Chassis shall meet all applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS).
3. The fuel system integrity shall meet the specified leakage performance standards
when impacted by a moving contoured barrier in accordance with test conditions
specified in FMVSS No. 301, Fuel System Integrity, or FMVSS No. 303, Fuel System
Integrity of Compressed Natural Gas Vehicles, as applicable.
4. Original equipment manufacturers (OEMs) and conversion systems using
compressed natural gas (CNG) shall comply with National Fire Protection Association
(NFPA) Specification 52 2013, Compressed Natural Gas Vehicular Fuel Systems.
Fuel systems using liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) shall comply with NFPA
Specification 58 2014, Liquefied Petroleum Gases Engine Fuel Systems.
5. Fuel tank(s) for vehicles of less than 54 passenger capacity powered by LPG or CNG
shall have a minimum 40-gallon capacity. Fuel tank(s) for vehicles of 54 or more
passenger capacity powered by LPG or CNG shall have a minimum 60- gallon
capacity.
6. Natural gas-powered buses may be equipped with an interior/exterior gas detection
system. All natural gas-powered buses may be equipped with an automatic or manual
fire detection and suppression system.
7. All materials and assemblies used to transfer or store alternative fuels shall be installed
outside the passenger/driver compartment.
8. All Types C and D buses using alternative fuels shall meet the same base
requirements of BUS CHASSIS SPECIFICATIONS for passenger load.
9. The total weight shall not exceed the vehicle's GVWR when loaded to rated capacity.
10. The manufacturer supplying the alternative fuel equipment must provide the owner and
operator with adequate training and certification in fueling procedures, scheduled
maintenance, troubleshooting and repair of alternative fuel equipment.
11. AII fueling equipment shall be designed specifically for fueling motor vehicles and shall
be certified by the manufacturer as meeting all applicable federal, state and industry
standards.
12. AII on-board fuel supply containers shall meet all appropriate requirements of the
American Society for Mechanical Engineering (ASME) code, U.S. Department of
Transportation (DOT) regulations or applicable FMVSSs and NFPA standards.
13. All fuel supply containers shall be securely mounted to withstand a static force of eight
times their weight in any direction.
14. AII safety devices that discharge to the atmosphere shall be vented to the outside of
the vehicle. The discharge line from the safety relief valve on all school buses shall
be located in a manner appropriate to the characteristics of the alternative fuel.
Discharge lines shall not pass through the passenger compartment.
15. CNG buses shall have a positive, quick-acting (ÂĽ turn) shut-off control valve shall be
installed in each gaseous fuel supply line, as close as possible to the fuel supply
containers. The valve controls shall be placed in a location easily operable from the
exterior of the vehicle. The location of the valve controls shall be clearly marked on the
exterior surface of the bus.
16. An electrical grounding system shall be required for grounding of the fuel system
during maintenance-related venting.
17. Fuel systems identified as compatible with biodiesel must be provided with
components compatible with biodiesel conforming to the specifications of ASTM
6751, Biodiesel Standard.
18. High Voltage-Powered Vehicles: Buses utilizing a high voltage propulsion system
(more than 48 nominal volts) shall meet the requirements of FMVSS 305, Electric
Powered Vehicles: Electrolyte Spillage and Electrical Shock Protection, except for the
following:
a. The propulsion power source (batteries, fuel cells, etc.) shall be located outside
the passenger compartment.
b. The propulsion power source enclosure shall be constructed to conform to the
power source manufacturer's requirements and recommendations.
c. Due to the much larger size and quantities of the propulsion power sources on
larger vehicles, buses over 10,000 lbs. are permitted to exceed the 5.0-liter
spillage constraint of Section S5.1, Electrolyte damage from propulsion batteries
and the requirements to statically rotate the vehicle on its longitudinal axis post-
test.
HIGH VOLTAGE-POWERED VEHICLES
The Mississippi School Bus Minimum Specification is the primary specification for all
public-school buses in Mississippi pursuant to Mississippi Code Annotated Section 37-
41-1: All applicable provisions of the Mississippi School Bus Minimum Specifications of
school bus body and chassis shall be adhered to unless specifically mentioned in this
section. This section and specifications listed in this section are for new electric school
buses only and does not allow for the modification of any existing school bus.
Training For State Personnel, Local School District Personnel, and First Responders
The vendor shall be required to provide training for state personnel, transportation
directors/supervisors, bus shop foreman, school bus mechanics/technicians, bus driver
instructors, bus operators, and first responders in the safe and efficient operation,
inspection, repair, maintenance, and emergency response of the bus. This training may
be provided at multiple locations around the state in response to local demands.
Compliance With FMVSS and SAE
A high voltage-powered vehicle shall meet all Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
and all Society of Automotive Engineers standards that are applicable at time of
manufacture.
HYBRID BUSES
Alternator
The alternator shall meet the applicable state specifications in the School Bus Body and
Chassis section. Alternately, the alternator functions may be performed by the Hybrid
Drive System Batteries.
Battery(ies)
Low Voltage Battery
The Low Voltage Battery shall meet the applicable state specifications in the School Bus
Body and Chassis. Alternately, the Low Voltage Battery functions may be performed by
the Hybrid Drive System Batteries.
Hybrid Drive System Batteries
A. Energy storage for the Hybrid Drive System shall be protected from crash impacts
and shall be encased in a non-conductive, acid-resistant compartment. This
compartment must be well ventilated to preclude the possibility of hydrogen gas
buildup. Energy storage shall be located in an area and in such a way as to provide
ease of service.
B. Batteries shall require automatic electrical isolation in the case of a vehicle crash.
C. The Hybrid Drive System Batteries shall allow for a minimum storage of 28 kWh
for charge depletion.
D. The high voltage battery system integrity shall meet the specified spillage
performance standards in accordance with test conditions specified in FMVSS No.
305 as applicable.
Battery Management System
A. The Hybrid Drive System Batteries may be equipped with a system that allows the
batteries to be charged via connection to the local electric utility, otherwise known
as a Plug-in Hybrid Electric system. The plug connector shall make a conductive
electrical connection and shall be an Apollo 200 AMP connector by BIW Connector
Systems or approved equal.
B. The Hybrid School Bus shall have equipment for monitoring the status of the
batteries while the batteries remain on the vehicle. This equipment shall include
the capability to balance the state of charge and monitor temperature of individual
battery modules (if appropriate).
Brakes, Service
The Hybrid School Bus shall include a regenerative braking system that uses the motor
and/or generator to slow the vehicle in conjunction with the service brakes while returning
electrical energy to the Hybrid Drive System Batteries.
Differential Ratio
The Differential shall be compatible with the Transmission/Hybrid Drive System and
provide for a minimum of 65 mph in highest gear.
Engine Equipment
A. The hybrid system shall include a system that deactivates the engine when not in
use, such as, at red lights, and reactivates the engine when needed for
acceleration.
B. The engine shall be equipped with system that electrically heats the engine to
maintain minimum starting temperature. This system should be integrated with the
Plug-in Battery Management System, if so equipped, and not require a separate
electrical grid connection. The engine heater shall also heat the fuel filtration
system. The engine heater shall be switched to allow this heating to be optional.
Fuel System Capability
The diesel fuel system shall be capable of operating with a 20 percent biodiesel blend
(B20).
High Voltage System
A. High Voltage-Powered Vehicles: Buses utilizing a high voltage propulsion system
(more than 48 normal volts) shall meet the requirements of FMVSS No. 305,
Electric Powered Vehicles: Electrolyte Spillage and Electrical Shock Protection,
except for the following:
1. The propulsion power source (batteries, fuel cells, etc.) shall be located outside
the passenger compartment.
2. The propulsion power source enclosure shall be constructed to conform to the
power source manufacturer's requirements and recommendations.
3. Due to the much larger size and quantities of the propulsion power sources
on larger vehicles, buses over 10,000 lbs. are permitted to exceed the 5.0-
liter spillage constraint of Section S5.1, Electrolyte damage from propulsion
batteries and the requirements to statically rotate the vehicle on its longitudinal
axis posttest.
B. Wire, cable, and conductor insulation in the High Voltage System shall provide
adequate insulation for the voltage used and for ambient temperatures ranging
from - 15°F to 120°F. All high voltage circuits shall be bright orange in color or
otherwise labeled as HIGH
C. VOLTAGE. All high voltage circuits shall provide adequate and automatic
protection against electrical overloads caused by short circuits or other excessive
current conditions through the use of fuses, circuit breakers, and ground fault
interruption.
D. Each door, cover, or other panel that affords immediate access to any high voltage
area shall be plainly marked with a hazard warning label which shall read
WARNING-HIGH VOLTAGE or DANGER-HIGH VOLTAGE. This label shall be
located in a highly conspicuous place. All high voltage access areas shall be
equipped with a lock or otherwise secured to prevent unauthorized access.
E. The High Voltage System should be designed so that when the ignition switch is
off, the propulsion motor is positively disconnected. All other accessories powered
by the main propulsion battery circuit shall remain operable when the ignition
switch is off.
F. All buses shall be equipped with an additional manual or automatic switch or
device independent of the propulsion motor disconnect controls that permits the
positive disconnection of all circuits from the Hybrid Drive System Batteries. This
switch shall be operable from outside the vehicle. Each door or panel providing
access to this switch shall be plainly marked to indicate that it is a main-power-
disconnect switch or device.
Ignition System
The ignition switch circuit shall be linked to the Battery Management System and will
prevent driving the vehicle while it is connected to an external battery charging source.
Transmission/Hybrid Drive System
A. The Hybrid Drive System shall work in conjunction with the chassis engine to
provide motive power to the bus. This system shall be automatically controlled
requiring no intervention by the driver after it has been put in forward or reverse
gear. Systems that require the use of a manual clutch or require the driver to shift
through a progression of gears will not be accepted.
B. The Hybrid drive controller/converter system shall incorporate a Ground Fault
lnterrupt (GFI) system that protects passengers and others from electrical shock
if a shorted circuit or water intrusion situation occurs.
C. The bus dash shall have an indicator light that indicates whether the bus is
operating in Charge Depleting or Charge Sustaining mode. Charge Depleting is an
operating mode in which the state of charge of the Hybrid Drive System Battery
decreases as the bus operates. At a certain minimum state of charge, the bus
becomes Charge Sustaining. Charge Sustaining is an operating mode in which the
Battery Management System seeks to maintain or increase the state of charge of
the Hybrid Drive System Battery. The Hybrid School Bus shall have the capability
to operate in both modes.
D. The Hybrid Drive System shall have a system for protecting system components
from thermal damage due to electrical overload. This system should include
temperature sensors at critical points and be capable of reducing Hybrid Drive
System electrical power when necessary. The bus dash shall have a warning light
that indicates when a Hybrid Drive System component exceeds a safe
temperature.
E. The warning light should illuminate prior to critical temperature to allow sufficient
time to safely stop the bus.
EQUIPMENT FOR TRANSPORTATION OF PRE-SCHOOL AGE CHILDREN
Each birth-to-K child (with or without a disability) shall be secured in Child Safety Restraint
System (CSRS) that is appropriate for the child’s age, weight, height, and development when
riding on a school bus or other school transportation vehicle. A CSRS is an add-on device
(or, in some cases, integrated into bus seating) that provides the positioning and safety
restraint required by birth-to-K children riding in any vehicle.
Note: The acronym CSRS is used as both singular and plural.
The rationale for the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration’s recommendation that
all birth-to-K children use CSRS on school buses of all sizes is provided in a guidance
document, “Guideline for the Safe Transportation of Preschool Age Children in School Buses”
(February 1999). NHTSA’s guidance document explains that its testing shows birth-to-K
children should be protected by CSRS on any school bus.
For passenger vehicles, like vans, SUVs and sedans, a child occupant protection law in each
state mandates the use of CSRS for all children, per the details of state code. While these
laws typically exclude school buses, they require the use of CSRS in any other vehicle used
for student transportation. These laws vary by state with respect to the child ages covered,
but all states require children in the birth-to-K cohort to ride in a properly used CSRS or
booster seat in passenger vehicles; many states require children up to much older ages to
ride in a CSRS or booster in passenger vehicles, as well.
According to NHTSA and the laws of each state, lap-only and lap-shoulder belts are not
CSRS. Following product instructions, children in passenger vehicles may use a booster seat
(see below) to provide protection and meet state laws, but a booster is not an appropriate
device to use when the vehicle is a school bus. CSRSs used in school buses must be
appropriate for the individual child and must be used correctly. All of the restraint systems
used for transportation must be secured to the bus seat in the manner prescribed and
approved by both the school bus and CSRS manufacturer.
A. All CSRSs used in the school bus or another vehicle used to transport children must:
1. Meet requirements of FMVSS No. 213 (213b, if purchased after December 5, 2026);
if purchased after June 30, 2025, must also meet FMVSS 213a;
2. Be installed and used according to the manufacturer's instructions; including
honoring manufacturer-stated product expiration dates.
3. Not be under a recall that recommends non-use of the CSRS; if other recalls exist,
they have been repaired following the instructions of the manufacturer’s fix kit;
4. Have all parts intact and in working order; and
5. Be installed only on bus seats that meet FMVSS No. 210 using a seat belt that meets
FMVSS 209 or lower anchors that meet FMVSS 225 if the CSRS is a conventional type
(which requires use of a seat belt or LATCH system for installation).
To ensure that a CSRS meets all these criteria, the LEA (not the child’s parent/guardian)
should provide the CSRS. Maintaining this policy allows the transporter to assess CSRS
suitability, now the CSRS’s full history, and include the CSRS in routine care and
maintenance procedures (see below). When transporters make exceptions – as they
sometimes do, for instance, when an infant’s parent/guardian owns a CSRS with a carry
handle that is also used for the child’s non-school-related transportation—the transporter
remains responsible for ensuring the CSRS is safe to use for every ride, following each of
the requirements enumerated above. If any CSRS is not suitable (that is, it is not in good
condition, inappropriate for the child, and/or unable to be installed and used properly) or
its suitability is in doubt, an appropriate alternative CSRS shall be supplied by the
transporter.
B. Elements of Correct Installation and Use of CSRS
The following elements of proper use apply to CSRS that are used in school buses
and/or non-school bus vehicles. Always read and follow the manufacturer’s
instructions that come with each CSRS. Quality, hands-on training on each of these
topics, offered on a routine basis, is essential for transporters of birth-to-K children.
a. Selection
The first step to selecting a CSRS is to identify the types/models that meet a
child’s age, weight, height, and development/transportation needs. From these
options, select the CSRS that can be installed properly in the vehicle, will be used
correctly on every ride, and meets budgetary considerations.
Children diagnosed with medical complexities or fragility might require special
securement or positioning systems, per their IFSP/IEP/Section 504 Plan.
However, it is appropriate for the IFSP/IEP/Section 504 Plan team to first
consider whether a conventional CSRS model (or, if transporting on a school bus,
a school bus child restraint system) could accommodate the child because these
CSRS are typically easier to use and acquire. For all children, selection of a
CSRS with a crotch strap, which will provide crash protection and prevent
strangulation caused by slouching during normal driving conditions, is essential.
b. Direction
Position a CSRS rear or forward facing based on product instructions relative to
the child’s age and size; adjust the recline angle according to instructions. Some
rear-facing seats are designed to be rear-facing only and may not be used in a
forward-facing position. (Check manufacturer’s instructions. The list of CSRS
models, below, describes the direction each CSRS type may be used.)
The rear-facing direction is most protective because it allows the child’s entire
back to absorb crash forces. This is essential for infants and toddlers, who have
relatively large heads and bones that are soft and undeveloped. If an infant faces
forward too soon, the severe pulling force of a crash could cause severe,
possibly fatal, injury to their spinal cord.
Therefore, best practice, according to the American Academy of Pediatrics, is to
keep children rear facing for as long as they fit a CSRS’s height and weight limits,
whether the vehicle is a school bus or other type of vehicle. In any vehicle, a
child must never ride forward facing prior to age one and, in many states, the
law prohibits children from riding forward facing until at least age two. Per
FMVSS 213, as of June 30, 2025, all CSRS with a forward-facing mode must
state 26.5 pounds or more as the minimum child weight for that mode.
Note: These laws and regulations reflect the minimums for turning forward. It is
recommended to follow best practice and keep children rear facing as long as
possible; using readily available models on the market, this is typically until at
least age two or longer. The recommendation applies to school buses and non-
school buses.
c. Location
CSRS shall be installed only on front-facing vehicle seats, per the instructions of
all CSRS manufacturers. On a school bus, use a location that will allow proper
space and supervision (often a front seat) that is not in an emergency exit row. If
other students will be seated on the same bench, install the CSRS by the window
to allow them clearance for egress.
In a non-school bus, birth-to-K children are safer using CSRS in a rear seat. If a
front seat must be used, ensure that the air bag is deactivated. Most vehicle
instructions prohibit using a rear-facing CSRS in a front seat, and the laws of
some states say that children must ride in the rear until they reach a specified
age.
d. Installation
• Follow all manufacturer instructions for installation, which typically
include the following guidance. For add-on CSRS that are installed
using a seat belt or the LATCH system, ensure that the correct belt path
is used, per instructions. To achieve a tight installation, use a hand to
push down on the CSRS to compress the bus/vehicle seat cushion.
Then, with the buckle(s) secured, pull the loose end of the webbing (of
a lap belt, lower anchor attachment, or cam wrap) or the shoulder belt
(of a lap-shoulder belt) to tighten the installation. The CSRS should not
move more than one inch forward or side-to-side when tested by
grasping the seat at the belt path. (See the USE of CSRS Tether
section, below, for CSRS that require the attachment of a tether during
installation.) When a CSRS with a cam wrap is properly installed, the
tightened cam wrap strap should slightly indent the top of the bus seat.
• The CSRS must fit properly on the vehicle seat. CSRS installed
adjacent to one another may not overhang into the aisle or press hard
into each other. Unrestrained children sharing a bench with a CSRS
must have enough room to be properly seated and fully protected by
compartmentalization.
• To improve CSRS installation and ease of use, since late 2011, FMVSS
222 requires the non-adjustable part of a school bus’s lap-only seat belt
(aka 2-point seat belt) to be on the side that’s relatively closer to the
aisle. The buckle on this part of the seat belt must be on webbing that
extends no more than one to two inches above the seat cushion, per
regulation. When retrofitting older buses that have reinforced seating
with a lap-only belt, or replacing existing belts with a different design,
these CSRS-friendly specifications should be followed.
e. Harness Strap Use
• Follow manufacturer’s instructions to properly adjust the harness that
holds the child within a conventional CSRS or the straps that restrain
the body for all other CSRS types, like safety vests. Check for
adjustability at the shoulders, crotch strap, and hips, as well as for the
proper use of manufacturer provided inserts and padding. Follow
instructions for setting each of these to be appropriate for the child for
first use and reassess periodically for child growth.
• Place the harness webbing over the child’s body according to the
CSRS instructions; it should cross both shoulders and hips and have a
crotch strap routed between the legs. Adjust the harness snugly on the
child for each ride. Use techniques to avoid touching sensitive areas
when securing the child in the harness, like keeping the back of the
hand toward the child’s body. Per NHTSA, a snug strap should not
allow any slack, should lie in a relatively straight line without sagging,
and should not press on the child's flesh or push the child's body into
an unnatural position. To test for proper snugness, slide a thumb and
forefinger vertically along the harness webbing to ensure it is not
possible to pinch any slack between them.
• A chest clip, which holds the harness straps across the shoulders,
should be placed at the child’s armpit level. A chest clip, when part of
a CSRS as provided by the manufacturer, shall not be removed from
the CSRS. Its function is pre-crash positioning of the harness webbing.
While this is an essential function, a chest clip is not intended to provide
crash restraint. Therefore, it is imperative that the buckle of the harness
system also be properly used.
• Heavy coats and backpacks should be removed prior to harness use
to ensure a proper fit. Do not add any additional padding underneath
or behind a child, other than that supplied by the manufacturer for use
with the CSRS. Use included padding according to manufacturer
instructions. Always follow the CSRS instructions for adjustments that
should be made to achieve proper harness fit and child positioning; if
all instructions have been followed and harness fit and/or child
positioning require further improvement, some instructions allow the
use of firmly rolled towels or small, receiving-type blankets alongside a
child's body (not head) and/or behind the CSRS's crotch strap.
• Special care must be taken when transporting children with medical
devices like gastrostomy tubes, shunts, and tracheostomy tubes. The
use of a CSRS (ideally in rear-facing mode, if possible) is especially
advised for these children, but transporters must ensure that webbing
straps are not positioned in a way that could disrupt the proper
functioning of the child’s medical device. (This sort of negative
interaction should be considered when selecting the CSRS, as well.)
C. Types of Child Safety Restraints Systems
All CSRS provide restraint at a child’s shoulders, hips and between the legs
(crotch strap); each component is essential for protecting the child in a
crash and keeping the child in position during normal transport.
CSRS types that are identified below using the term “conventional” are
those that are sold through retailers and have been designed by their
manufacturers for the primary use of families in non-school bus vehicles
(vans, SUVs, sedans). But conventional CSRS may also be used for school
transportation, including use on a school bus, provided the bus seating has
adequate space and is equipped with seat belts or lower anchors for proper
anchorage. For some children, a conventional CSRS is the only type that
will meet their needs.
A term defined by NHTSA for another CSRS category is “school bus child
restraint systems,” which includes CSRS for use only on a school bus
(never a non-school bus, like a van, SUV, or sedan); this type is acquired
from a manufacturer or its distributor. Any CSRS that is installed using a
cam wrap falls into this category. When a cam wrap is used for installation,
the entire bench behind a CSRS installed using a cam wrap shall be
unoccupied or occupied only by restrained passengers, per NHTSA
labeling.
The following lists the various CSRS types that may be used by
transportation providers in school buses and/or non-school bus vehicles.
Each CSRS’s description indicates whether the CSRS may be used in both
school bus and non-school bus vehicles (vans, SUVs, sedans) or only in
one of these vehicle types.
a. Rear-facing-only conventional CSRS
•
Bucket-style, padded CSRS with a five-point harness that typically
come with a base, though instructions are usually provided for
optional use in baseless mode, as well. Of the two CSRS types for
rear-facing use, this type, commonly called an “infant seat,” is
smaller and has a handle for carrying outside the vehicle. May be
used in a school bus or non-school bus vehicle, provided the
seating has adequate space and seat belts or lower anchors for
anchorage.
•
Designed for infants (typically from four or five pounds) up to 30 to
35 pounds and who are up to 30 to 35 inches in length, depending
on the model. The child’s head must be contained within the shell
of the CSRS; instructions typically require the top of the child’s head
to be at least an inch from the top of the CSRS shell. These CSRS
must be used in a rear-facing position only. Follow instructions for
setting the CSRS to a roughly 45- degree recline, which prevents
the child’s head from tipping forward and blocking the airway during
normal driving conditions.
•
Harness straps must be snug. Each shoulder strap must emerge
from the CSRS at or the next position below the seated infant’s
shoulders.
b. Convertible conventional CSRS
•
CSRS with a five-point harness that have both rear- and forward-
facing modes. These CSRS have a rigid, padded seating area made
of plastic (and sometimes metal) that usually has deep sides that
wrap around the child’s body and head. May be used in a school
bus or non-school bus vehicle, provided the seating has adequate
space and seat belts or lower anchors for anchorage. (Some
convertible CSRS, called “all-in-one,” also have a booster mode that
should not be used on a school bus.)
•
Rear-facing mode may typically be used by children from five
pounds to 40 or more pounds and up to 40 or more inches in length,
depending on the model. Convertible CSRS are the only alternative
to a rear-facing-only CSRS for riding rear facing; being larger, they
require more vehicle space, but are the only option when children
who are bigger/taller must ride rear facing. The child’s head must be
contained within the shell of the CSRS, following manufacturer’s
instructions, which typically require the child’s head to be at least an
inch from the top of the CSRS shell.
•
Forward-facing mode is appropriate for children who have outgrown
rear-facing mode. Forward-facing mode may typically be used by
children who are at least 1 year old and 22 up to 50 or 65 pounds
and 40 to 50 inches in height, depending on the model. (For CSRS
made June 30, 2025, and after, the minimum weight to
•
Set the angle of the CSRS according to the manufacturer’s
instructions for the mode in use. Typically, a rear-facing convertible
CSRS should be reclined to a 30- to 45-degree angle to prevent the
child’s head from tipping forward and blocking the airway. When
forward facing, a convertible CSRS is used more upright, but many
models offer semi-reclined positions, as well.
•
The harness straps must emerge from the CSRS at or the next
position below the seated child’s shoulders when rear facing; it must
emerge at or the next position above the shoulders when forward
facing. When forward facing, if the child’s shoulders are above the
top-most position, the child is too tall to use the CSRS, even if they
are within the occupant weight range.
c. C o m b i n a t i o n c o n v e n t i o n a l CSRSs
•
Forward-facing CSRS with a rigid, padded seating area made of
plastic (and sometimes metal) that has a five-point harness mode
and a booster mode. May be used in a school bus or non-school
bus vehicle, provided the seating has adequate space and seat
belts or lower anchors for anchorage.
•
In harness mode, designed for use by children at least age one and
22 pounds (26.5 for CSRS made June 30, 2025, and after, per
federal regulation) and up to 50 to 65 pounds and around 50 inches
in height, depending on the model. The child must be able to safely
ride in a forward-facing position, so a combination CSRS must
never be used by a child younger than age one and ideally not until
well over age two; follow the manufacturer’s specified minimum
age/weight/height that’s stated in instructions and any applicable
state laws regarding the age at which a child may ride forward
facing.
The harness can be stowed for larger children so the CSRS can be
used as a booster seat; see instructions for allowed size and age
ranges. The booster mode is useful in non-school bus vehicles but
should not be used on a school bus. Nonetheless, because these
types tend to be less bulky than convertible CSRS—and some
models allow use by taller children—they are sometimes useful in
their harness mode for children on school buses.
•
An upright position is often the only option; sometimes a semi-
reclined position is offered, per instructions.
•
Follow instructions for harness adjustment, which typically requires
the straps to emerge from the CSRS at or in the next slot above a
seated child’s shoulders. If the child’s shoulders are above the top-
most position, the child is too tall to use the CSRS, even if they are
within the occupant weight range.
d. Booster seats (Note: For use in non-school buses only)
•
A booster seat (aka belt-positioning booster or BPB) is a device for
passenger vehicles (vans, SUVs, sedans, etc.) that elevates a
child’s body and guides a lap-shoulder seat belt across bones
rather than soft tissue, allowing the occupant to be safely restrained
by the vehicle’s seat belt and benefit from its other occupant
protection systems of passenger vehicles, like side air bags.
•
Booster seats are designed for use by children who weigh at least
40 pounds; instructions may also state a minimum height and/or
age. They may be used until a child is 80 to 120 pounds and around
57 to 60 inches, depending on the model. A child should be at least
age four or five before transitioning from a CSRS with a harness to
a booster seat; follow model-specific requirements provided in the
instructions and any applicable state laws.
•
Dedicated booster seats come in backless and/or high back
designs. Other boosters are part of multi-modal CSRS, in which a
harness system may be used for rear- and/or forward-facing
conventional modes and then removed or stowed when the child is
ready to transition using the CSRS in booster mode.
•
Laws in all states require children in passenger vehicles— including
those in the care of student transporters—to use a booster seat if
they’ve outgrown the harness of a convertible or combination CSRS
before reaching a specified age, height, and/or weight. Student
transporters who utilize passenger vehicles to transport birth-to-K
children shall follow these laws. A child who uses a booster should
continue to do so until they fit the vehicle’s seat belt properly.
•
Booster seats shall not be used in a school bus since, unlike
passenger vehicles, school bus seats and their seat belt systems
are designed to fit a child’s body. Occupants who are too small to
properly use a school bus’s seat belt (even after adjusting it to its
smallest size) or who need more support should ride in a CSRS
instead.
•
In alternative vehicles, a booster shall be used to position a lap-
shoulder seat belt. A booster shall not be used with a lap only seat
belt.
e. Car Bed CSRS
A car bed is a CSRS for very small and/or fragile infants that allows the
child to ride lying down. For any vehicle, this type of CSRS is used only
on the direct advice of an infant's doctor because the child must remain
in a prone, supine, or (allowed for some models) right-side lying
position. Children who must ride in a car bed are not likely to be taken
to school; whenever possible, an infant should be deemed stable for
riding rear facing in a semi-reclined position before transportation is
provided. If an infant's doctor says they must use a car bed for transport
to school, all instructions from the doctor and car bed manufacturer for
proper installation and use in a school bus or non-school bus vehicle
shall be followed.
f. Adaptive CSRS
•
Adaptive CSRS are models that have been specially designed to
accommodate one or more needs of a child with disabilities. Models
exist for a variety of purposes, including to allow use of a five-point
harness by larger children, support a fully reclined position, prevent
injury to fragile/sensitive areas, inhibit “escapee” behavior, or
accommodate medical equipment (like casts or braces). A list of all
available
adaptive
CSRS
models,
with
prices,
approved
height/weight ranges, and other details, can be found at
www.saferidenews.com
(see
Adaptive
CR
Listing
under
Resources).
•
Adaptive CSRS are generally heavier/larger, more expensive, and
have more complex use instructions than other types of CSRS.
Therefore, an adaptive CSRS should be selected for a child only
when other options have been evaluated and found to be
unacceptable. For many conditions, a conventional CSRS (or, if
transporting on a school bus, a school bus child restraint system)
can provide adequate support, comfort, recline, and positioning for
a birth-to-K child. However, depending on a child’s needs, an
IFSP/IEP/Section 504 team (with input from the child's doctor, as
appropriate) may specify the permanent or temporary use of a
specific adaptive model.
•
While the elements of correct CSRS use (listed above) apply to
adaptive CSRS, adaptive CSRS often have instructions that are not
typical of other CSRS and may have specialized accessories that
must be used properly. Adaptive CSRS may be used in a school
bus or non-school bus vehicle, provided the seating has adequate
space and allows for proper anchorage, though many models tend
to be more compatible with non-school bus vehicles.
Note: Although adaptive CSRS must meet federal standards, they
are exempt from the untethered testing requirements that other
CSRS must meet. So, another complexity of adaptive CSRS is that
instructions typically require a tether to be attached to a designated
tether anchor in the vehicle, whether in a school bus or non-school
bus. See Tethering CSRS (below) for information on this topic.
g. Safety Vest CSRS
•
A webbing-based CSRS that fits around the child’s torso and has
attachment loops at the shoulders and hips to connect it to a seat
mount installed in the vehicle.
•
Safety vests may be used by children starting at 25 or 31 pounds
and up to 165 to 168 pounds, depending on the model. The child
must be able to safely ride in a forward-facing position, so a safety
vest shall never be worn by a child younger than age 1 and ideally
not until well over age two; follow the manufacturer’s specified
minimum age when stated in instructions and any applicable state
laws regarding that age at which a child may ride forward facing.
Some product instructions allow the continued use of a safety vest
as a positioning device after the child reaches the upper weight limit
if used under a properly worn seat belt; check instructions for other
conditions that must be met for use in this mode with heavier
children.
•
Some safety vests attach to a seat mount that is installed on the
school bus seat (traditional or FMVSS 210-compliant) using a cam
wrap, which is a strap that runs through the seat bight and vertically
around the seatback. A cam wrap mount (sometimes called a
“portable seat mount” when used with a safety vest), shall be used
only on a school bus (never on a non-school bus). IMPORTANT:
Per NHTSA requirements, to protect the CSRS occupant from the
negative effect of double loading the seatback in a crash, the entire
bench behind a CSRS installed using a cam wrap must be
unoccupied or occupied only by restrained occupants.
•
Another option for some safety vests is a seat mount with a tether
that is used along with a vehicle seat belt worn by a child in a safety
vest, following manufacturer instructions. This seat mount type is
more commonly used in non-school buses, where it is the only
installation option (a cam wrap may not be used in passenger
vehicles). This method is more often compatible in non-school
buses because, in these vehicles, seat belts are always present
and tether anchors have been required since model year 2000.
(Although a safety vest used with a seat belt and a tether mount
may be used on a school bus, the bus seating and belts must meet
federal requirements, and a tether anchor must be present; usually,
this is not the case on a school bus. Therefore, on school buses, a
cam wrap mount is more appropriate.)
•
Safety vests are sized according to the child’s circumference at the
chest and/or hips and should be adjusted to fit snugly per
manufacturer instructions. Heavy clothing like a coat should be
removed before putting the safety vest on a child; a coat may be
worn over a properly adjusted safety vest. A properly fitted crotch
strap shall always be used on a safety vest that accommodates a
child up to 80 pounds and is strongly recommended for use on all
safety vests. For a child with an IFSP/IEP/Section 504 Plan, the
decision to use a vest with a rear zipper closure and/or other anti-
escape features should be made by the IFSP/IEP/Section 504 Plan
team.
•
Transportation personnel should check seat mount straps for
proper installation and set-up for fit to the child during pre-trip
inspections.
h. School Bus Only CSRS
•
A five-point harness attached to a slim back pad and seating surface
(no rigid plastic shell) that installs to school bus seating using a cam
wrap. A school-bus-only CSRS shall never be used in a non-school
bus vehicle.
•
May be used by children starting at 20 or 25 pounds and up to 65 to
90 pounds, depending on the model. (At least one model that’s
available for children with disabilities can be used to a higher
weight.) The child must be able to safely ride in a forward-facing
position, so a school-bus-only CSRS must never be worn by a child
younger than age one and ideally not until well over age two; follow
the manufacturer’s specified minimum age when stated in
instructions and any applicable state laws regarding the age at
which a child may ride forward facing.
•
Installs on the school bus seat (traditional or FMVSS 210-compliant)
by means of a cam wrap strap (not a seat belt), which runs through
the seat bight and vertically around the seatback. Per NHTSA
requirements, to protect the CSRS occupant from the negative effect
of double loading the seatback in a crash, the entire bench behind a
CSRS installed using a cam wrap must be unoccupied or occupied
only by restrained occupants.
•
The shoulder strap height should be adjusted so it is at or the next
position above the seated child’s shoulders. If the child’s shoulders
are above the top-most position, the child is too tall to use the CSRS,
even if they are within the occupant weight range.
i.
Belt Converter CSRS
•
A webbing-based CSRS consisting of shoulder straps and a crotch
strap (or straps) attached to a cam wrap or tether that, when
installed, turns a seat belt (typically a lap-only belt) into a five-point
harness. Must be used with a seat belt that meets FMVSS 209 on
seating that meets FMVSS 210 for proper anchorage strength.
•
A belt converter CSRS may be used by children starting at 25 or 31
pounds, depending on the model. Used in a school bus, a belt
converter may be used up to 168 to 275 pounds, depending on the
model; in a passenger vehicle (in which only the tether-mounted
option may be used) follow instructions for child weight limits that
apply to use of the vehicle’s tether anchor(s). To use a belt
converter, a child must be able to safely ride in a forward-facing
position, so this type shall not be used until a child is at least age
two; follow the manufacturer’s specified minimum age when stated
in instructions and any applicable state laws regarding the age at
which a child may ride forward facing. It is also important to
recognize that it takes most children longer to attain the stature and
maturity needed to properly use a belt converter CSRS than other
types of CSRS. Therefore, besides the child's age, these fit and use
factors must also be carefully considered when assessing this
CSRS type for a child.
•
A belt converter that installs using a cam wrap (a strap that runs
through the seat bight and vertically around the seatback) may be
used only on a school bus on seating that is reinforced (meets
FMVSS 210) and equipped with a seat belt (meeting FMVSS 209).
Per NHTSA requirements, to protect the CSRS occupant from the
negative effect of double loading the seatback in a crash, the entire
bench behind a cam-wrap installed CSRS must be unoccupied or
occupied only by restrained occupants.
•
A belt converter that installs using a tether strap requires the seating
to be reinforced and equipped with a seat belt and tether anchor.
This is the only type of belt converter that may be used in non-school
buses. (Although a belt converter that installs using a tether strap
may be used on a school bus if the bus seating meets the
requirements, the type with a cam wrap is more common and more
often suitable for use on school buses.)
•
The belt converter should be adjusted per the owner’s manual
instructions, which indicate that the shoulder and crotch straps
should be made snug but must not pull the vehicle lap belt upward,
off the thigh and onto the child’s stomach. To provide crash
protection and prevent dangerous slouching during normal driving
conditions, the crotch strap shall always be used and properly
adjusted.
j.
Built-in (aka Integrated) CSRS
•
A webbing-based CSRS that is permanently mounted to a school
bus seatback as purchased from the seating manufacturer.
Typically, a padded flap folds down off the seatback to reveal a five-
point harness system; the flap becomes a seating surface for the
child (often by folding it to provide some elevation). The CSRS’s
cover flap can be folded back up (often secured using Velcro) when
the CSRS is not in use so that the seat can be used by older
students, as well.
•
Built-in CSRS typically may be used by children from 20 or 22
pounds up to 85 to 90 pounds, depending on the instructions
provided by the seating manufacturer. To use a built-in CSRS, a
child must be able to safely ride in a forward-facing position, so this
type shall not be worn by a child younger than age one and ideally
not until well over age two; follow the manufacturer’s specified
minimum age when stated in instructions and any applicable state
laws regarding the age at which a child may ride forward facing.
•
The shoulder strap height should be adjusted so it is at or the next
position above the seated child’s shoulders. If the child’s shoulders
are above the top-most position, the child is too tall to use the CSRS,
even if they are within the occupant weight range.
•
Although a built-in CSRS does not require installation, training on
proper harness use, care, and maintenance for this type of CSRS
should not be overlooked.
•
While, in the past, some non-school bus vehicles were equipped
with built-in CSRS, these vehicles were rare and are seldom seen
in use today. Follow all vehicle manufacturer instructions for using a
factory-installed built-in CSRS in a non-school bus vehicle. A non-
school bus vehicle should not be retrofitted with seating with built-in
CSRS made for a school bus.
D. Care and Maintenance of CSRS
As with all transportation equipment, policies and procedures should be
established for cleaning and inspection of the CSRS inventory, both in use and in
reserve, to ensure all CSRS are in good working order. Such policies should be
in writing, and a maintenance document should be used to manage tasks and
assign duties.
1. Registration: Upon acquiring any CSRS, it should be registered with the
manufacturer so that the owner will be notified in the event of a recall or safety
update.
2. Recalls: The CSRS inventory shall be regularly checked for recalls. In
addition to responding to manufacturer notifications, this procedure should
involve
proactively
checking
for
recalls
periodically
at
www.NHTSA.gov/recalls for each model (name/model number and
manufacture date) and/or by subscribing to NHTSA’s email notification
service and checking recalls against the transporter’s CSRS inventory list.
When recalls occur, a CSRS shall be pulled from use and an unrecalled,
equally suitable replacement CSRS deployed until the manufacturer’s recall
fix has been completed and recorded.
3. Expiration: CSRS should be continually tracked for product expiration;
products that exceed the manufacturer’s stated lifespan should be taken out
of use and replaced, as needed. Instructions and labeling typically explain
how long a CSRS may be used, but if a product’s expiration date is unclear,
contact the manufacturer.
4. Cleaning: Procedures for cleaning CSRS shall follow each manufacturer’s
instructions for the specific CSRS model. Manufacturer websites typically
provide cleaning information, as well. In general, the use of chemicals should
be avoided when cleaning any part of a CSRS (webbing, plastic, padding,
buckles and other metal parts). Check instructions to learn whether padding
can be machine washed and/or dried. Follow product instructions for whether
certain parts may be removed for cleaning and, if so, how to remove and
replace them properly.
5. Damage Screening/Repair: CSRS used by children shall be checked over for
signs of degradation due to use, including, but not limited to, fraying of
harness webbing, rusting of metal parts, cracked plastic, and mildew/mold
growth on any part. This should involve spot-checking CSRS with each use
as well as a more thorough evaluation of all CSRS on a scheduled, routine
basis. When damaging wear is identified, appropriate steps to rectify it shall
be taken, which may require replacing the CSRS. Any steps taken to fix a
worn CSRS shall be undertaken by contacting the product manufacturer and
following its approved steps; in some cases, parts can be ordered/replaced.
6. Disposal of CSRS: Proper disposal of damaged, faulty, or expired CSRS
involves destroying the CSRS (i.e., cutting harness straps, removing padding,
marking plastic as “do not use”) so that it will not be used by others by
mistake. In some locales, recycling CSRS parts is an option that should be
considered
E. Use of CSRS Tethers
All conventional CSRS that can be used forward facing have a tether strap to add a
third point of securement that protects the occupants head when they ride forward
facing. These CSRS have instructions that strongly urge that the tether strap be
attached to a designated vehicle tether anchor whenever possible. However, for some
CSRS, attaching the tether is a requirement, not an option.
Per FMVSS 225, passenger vehicles (SUVs, vans, sedans) made since model year
2001 must have a minimum of three tether anchors for attaching CSRS tethers, with
few exceptions. Some passenger vehicles have more than three tether anchors.
Whenever a forward-facing CSRS is used in a non-school bus vehicle in a seating
position with a tether anchor, the tether anchor should be used, following all vehicle
and CSRS instructions. When assigning a seat in a passenger vehicle for a child who
rides in a forward-facing CSRS, selecting a seat equipped with a tether anchor should
be a priority.
School buses of all sizes are exempt from the tether anchor requirement of FMVSS
225. However, some school bus seating has been voluntarily equipped with tether
anchors. Contact the bus seating manufacturer to learn more about the availability of
tether anchors on school bus seating.
If instructions for a CSRS require tethering but the seating lacks a factory-installed
tether anchor (or the combined weight of the child and the CSRS exceeds a limit
stated by the vehicle manufacturer for use of the tether anchor), an alternative
solution shall be found that allows proper use. Options to consider include:
1. Using a different CSRS that does not require tethering. (Depending on what is
written in the child’s IFSP/IEP/Section 504 Plan, however, this approach may
require the team to reconvene to approve a change.)
2. Serving the child using a different vehicle or moving the CSRS to a different
seating position within the vehicle.
3. Retrofitting the seating with a tether anchor. This option is especially viable in
school buses, provided the seating is reinforced to meet FMVSS 210. Contact
the school bus manufacturer to discuss this option. It is far less likely that a
passenger vehicle may be retrofitted with additional tether anchors, but it is
sometimes possible for vehicles made in the 1990s. Contact the vehicle
manufacturer or a dealer’s parts department to discuss this option.
4. Tethering to a seat belt in the row behind the CSRS in school buses or to a
third-row seat belt when a child is seated in the second row of a non-school
bus. However, before using this technique, contact the CSRS and vehicle
seating manufacturer to secure approval; not all manufacturers approve this
tethering method. A child passenger safety technician can assist with properly
tethering to a seat belt in the row behind a CSRS, which typically involves
buckling a seat belt, wrapping the tether around it, and attaching the tether
hook to the tether strap. When a CSRS in a school bus is tethered to a seat
belt in the row behind it, the entire bench behind the CSRS shall be
unoccupied.
F. Handing off Birth-to-K Children
1. All birth-to-K children shall be met at drop-off by a responsible person who has
been pre-approved. The receiving person shall be an adult or a person of an age
deemed appropriate for child supervision by child protective services.
2. Policies shall be in place that outline procedures to follow if someone is not
present to receive a birth-to-K child at their stop or if a person present has not
been approved for hand-off. Unmet children should be returned to the school or
other pre-planned location so that school officials can attempt to contact
parents/guardians for resolution.
G. Medical Equipment
1. All decisions regarding medical equipment in the school bus should be made in
accordance with state laws and regulations. Decisions regarding medical
equipment should be the joint decision of trained personnel who are
knowledgeable about the type of medical assistance and support a school age
child, infant, toddler or pre-school child may need while in a school bus;
2. Decisions should be made by qualified team members in attendance at IFSP or
IEP meetings, including the parent. The IFSP or IEP document should include all
the appropriate information. Safe transportation specifications should be
documented on the IFSP or IEP;
3. Some special considerations and recommendations are as follows:
a. All medical support equipment shall be secured at the mounting location to
withstand a pulling force of five times the weight of the item;
b. Latched compartments are the preferred methods of transport;
c. All medical equipment should be secured below the window;
d. Oxygen equipment (liquid or gas) should be approved by the
manufacturer for transport and should be securely mounted and
fastened to the bus to prevent damage and exposure to intense heat
levels.
Note: Refer to the SPECIALLY EQUIPPED SCHOOL BUS
SPECIFICATIONS section.
H. Post-Trip and Post-Run Segment Checks
Wrimen policies and procedures shall be in place for post-trip and post-run
segment checks. As with any student population, drivers are responsible for
conducting a walkthrough inspection of the school bus following drop-offs at
each school and after the last delivery on each run segment. Prior to
departing the bus for any length of time, a walkthrough inspection must be
conducted. Birth-to-K children are much more likely than older children to
have fallen asleep during a school bus ride, so during a walk-through
inspection, check on and under the seats for sleeping or hiding children.
Identify any items that may have been dropped or left aboard the bus.
Warning flag systems and/or electronic means may be used; however, the
school bus driver is responsible for ensuring that the post-trip inspection has
been made
SALE AND DISPOSAL OF USED PUPIL TRANSPORTATION EQUIPMENT
Mississippi Code Sections Ann. §37-7-451 through 37-7-457 provide authority for the
Disposition of Property Not Needed for School Purposes. This has been considered a
legal means of selling school buses that are no longer needed in the transportation
program. Advertisement for competitive bids on the sale of this equipment is required
under the above sections. In the event that one school district sells transportation
equipment to another school district, it is necessary to comply with the provisions of
Section 37-41-101(5), MS Code of 1972, amended. It is not necessary to obtain approval
from the Mississippi Department of Education to dispose of said equipment.
The procedures outlined in this section should be used in order to assure the proper
disposal of school buses that are sold or otherwise removed from the local education
agency's school bus fleet.
If the bus is sold to another local education agency, private school, or other educational
agency that will continue to use the vehicle as a school bus, only the name of the school
system and the tag should be removed. If the bus is sold or traded to a dealer, only the
tag should be removed. The school bus dealer will remove the name of the school district.
Federal and state law requires that school buses be equipped with signal lamps and other
visual signals and markings that clearly identify the vehicle as a school bus. School buses
are also equipped with specialized equipment that are designed to protect students,
school bus drivers, and motorists. These visual markings, signals, and other specialized
equipment, which include amber and red flashing lights, stop signs, warning signs on the
rear of the bus, school bus lettering, and crossing control arms, are peculiar to school
buses and may not be used on other vehicles, except as provided under Mississippi law.
Accordingly, the disposal of school buses requires measures above and beyond those
necessary for the disposal of other school district vehicles.
To avoid possible liability, improve security, and also ensure compliance with the law, the
following procedures should be followed when disposing of buses that will no longer be
used as school buses:
A. Disable the overhead amber and red flashing lamps, stop arm(s), and crossing
arm used for loading and unloading students.
B. Remove all references to the entire name of the school district on the sides of the
bus, not just the name of the county or city.
C. Remove the words "SCHOOL BUS" on the front and rear of the bus.
D. Remove the tag from the vehicle before the sale.
Mississippi Code Ann. §63-7-79
1. Any person who owns or operates a used school bus for the purpose of
transportation or use of any kind on the public roads and highways of the State of
Mississippi, other than for school purposes, shall change the color of such bus
from the regular school bus color of yellow or national school bus chrome to a color
in contrast to this color before such bus can be used or operated on the highways
or public roads in Mississippi.
2. The vendor or owner of any school bus shall inform the purchaser in writing at or
prior to the time of the sale of any bus not to be used for school purposes as to the
requirements of this section.
3. Any person who shall violate the provisions of this section shall, upon conviction
thereof, be fined not less than twenty-five dollars (425.00) nor more than one
hundred dollars ($100.00).
APPENDIX A - COLORADO RACKING LOAD TEST
The Colorado Racking Test shall be required on or before the acceptance date of the
first bus of the respective configuration.
TEST PROCEDURE:
In addition to complying with the test procedures described in FMVSS No. 220, the body
manufacturers shall record and report the downward vertical movement of the force at 0, 25,
50, 75 and 100 percent of the maximum force (both loading and unloading). The expected
force deflection curve is illustrated schematically in Figure 1a. Low load nonlinearities may
indicate joint deformation; high load nonlinearities may indicate yielding in structural members.
A second load cycle shall be performed following the procedure given in the first paragraph.
The expected force-deflection curve is illustrated schematically in Figure 1b. Any hysteresis
following the initial shakedown will be revealed by this second cycle.
Figure 1. Static Load Test Load-Deflection Curves
A diagonal (racking) load test must be performed on types A, B, C and D school buses to
assure adequate shear stiffness and strength of the bus body. Details of the test are
provided below:
A two-cycle loading sequence shall be conducted following the described procedure.
A. Requirements: When a force equal to 1 1/2 times the gross vehicle weight (GVW) is
applied to the edge of the roof of the vehicle's body structure through a force
application plate, as specified in Test Procedures (b):
1. The diagonal movement of the force at any point on the application plate shall
not exceed 5 1/8 inches; and
2. Each emergency exit of the vehicle provided in accordance with FMVSS No. 217
shall be capable of operation as specified in that standard during the full
application of the force and after release of the force.
B. Test Procedures: Each vehicle shall be capable of meeting the requirements of (1)
and (2) when tested in accordance with the procedures set forth below.
a. The vehicle shall be supported on a rigid surface along the lower edge of the
frame or along the body sills in the absence of a frame.
b. The load shall be applied through a force application plate that is flat and rigid.
The dimensions of the plate shall be chosen to assure that the plate edges never
make contact with the vehicle skin during testing. A typical width is 18 inches, and
a typical length is 20 inches less that the length of the vehicle's roof measured
along its longitudinal centerline.
c. Place the force application plate in contact with the edge of the vehicle roof. Orient
the plate so that its flat, rigid surface is perpendicular to a diagonal line connecting
the most distant points on an interior cross-section of the vehicle. The rear edge
of the plate shall be positioned approximately 20 inches from the rear edge of the
vehicle roof. A temporary stand may be used to support the plate until a force is
applied.
d. Apply an evenly distributed force in a diagonally downward direction through the
force application plate at any rate not more than 0.5 inch per second, until a force
of 500 pounds has been applied.
e. Apply additional force in a diagonally downward direction through the force
application plate at a rate of not more than 0.5 inch per second until the force
specified in (a) has been applied, and maintain this application of force.
f. Measure the diagonal movement of any point on the force application plate that
occurred during the application of force in accordance with (b)(5), and open the
emergency exits as specified in (a)(2).
g. Release all diagonal force applied through the force application plate, and
operate the emergency exits as specified in (a)(2).
C. Test Conditions: The following conditions apply to the requirements specified in (3).
a. Temperature: The ambient temperature is between 32 degrees F and 90
degrees F.
b. Windows and Doors: Vehicle windows, doors, and emergency exits are in the
fully-closed position, and latched but not locked.
D. An alternative method of testing for the racking load test shall be as follows:
The racking load shall be applied along a line connecting the most distant points on
a transverse cross- section of the bus interior. It produces a shear distortion of the
cross-section, as shown in figure 2.
A representative method of loading that employs a hydraulic jack to load a two-
frame test assembly is illustrated in figure 2.
The maximum jack load for the two-frame assembly is determined by the following
formula:
J = 2P J - maximum jack load for two-frame test assembly P = load/frame
where P = Dynamic Vehicle Weight (DVW) divided by N DVW - dynamic vehicle weight
N - total number of bus body frames and DVW = DF x GVW
DF - dynamic factor, not less than 1.5 GVW - gross vehicle weight
Thus, for a DF = 1.5, a GVW = 22,000 pounds-force (lbf) and N= 11, the dynamic
vehicle weight is DVW = 33,000 lbf, the load/frame is P = 3000 lbf and the maximum
jack load is J = 6000 lbf.
When a complete bus body is rack-loaded, the total load DVW must be distributed
uniformly along the bus body. This may be accomplished by mounting a series of
hydraulic jacks along the length of the bus interior. Seats may be removed to facilitate
jack mounting. The rack load will be considered to be uniformly distributed when the
variation in the hydraulic jack readings is less than 10 percent. A maximum load is the
sum of all jack readings and shall equal DVW.
Transverse Cross Section
Side View
Figure 2. Arrangement of Hydraulic Jack for Rack-Loading of Two-Frame Assembly
The test may be performed on a complete bus body or on a representative section
composed of at least two complete frames (body posts plus roof bows) and floor.
Standard seats may be installed in the test section in a manner identical to that of
the full bus body. Fabrication procedures for the test assembly shall be identical to
those used in normal bus body production.
A two-cycle loading sequence shall be conducted, with intermediate and final load
and deflection readings recorded, according to the procedure described.
The maximum deflection in line with the jack (A, maximum) shall not exceed 4 inches.
Manufacturer shall specify which testing method was used and submit appropriate
certification information.
APPENDIX B - KENTUCKY POLE TEST
The Kentucky Pole Test shall be required on or before the acceptance date of the first bus of
the respective configuration.
TEST PROCEDURE:
The body shall be impacted at any point along the roof line on the outside surface, using an
8-inch diameter cylinder, 48 inches long, at a 30-to-45-degree angle, 1 to 3 inches above the
top window line. The cylinder shall impact the roofline with the 48 inches dimension in a
vertical plane with a force not to exceed 10 inches maximum to 8 inches minimum penetration
of the body panels into the passenger compartment after impact.
The manufacturer shall submit appropriate certification information.
SCHOOL BUS INSPECTION
The purpose of the school bus inspection section is to standardize safety inspection criteria
for local school system bus inspectors, technicians, maintenance supervisors and
transportation directors to ensure that maintenance personnel are knowledgeable with the
mechanical components of the school bus, know which components to inspect, how to inspect
each component, and how to identify which items are in need of repair, which defects
constitute an out-of-service condition, and be aware of all the applicable construction
standards, laws, rules, and all other requirements. School districts are required to conduct
quarterly inspections on all school buses, multifunction school activity buses, and vehicles
other than school buses used for student transportation.
While this section clarifies many issues pertaining to school bus safety inspections, it will not
answer all technical or interpretive questions. Please refer to the school bus manufacturer
and equipment suppliers for inspection procedures as appropriate. In all instances, trained
personnel must exercise professional judgment and remember that safety is the foremost
consideration when inspecting school buses in Mississippi.
The School Bus Inspection Section of this publication includes copyrighted works provided
by, and licensed from, the Commercial Vehicle Safety Alliance’s North American Uniform Out-
of-Service Criteria. Copyrighted items are indicated with the copyright symbol ©.
OUT-OF-SERVICE CRITERIA
The purpose of the out-of-service criteria is to identify school bus components and provide
tolerances the inspectors can utilize to determine if a school bus is safe for student
transportation.
RESOURCE INFORMATION
49 CFR PARTS 570.1-570.63, Vehicle in Use Inspection Standards
49 CFR PARTS 400-599, Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
49 CFR PARTS 393, 396, Federal Motor Carrier Safety Regulations
49 CFR APPENDIX A to Subchapter B, Minimum Periodic Inspection Standards
Commercial Vehicle Safety Alliance (CVSA) North American Uniform Out-of-Service Criteria
Note: References to these citations below may include only the number for brevity; e.g.
(393.203) instead of (49 CFR, Part 393.203).
SCHOOL BUS OUT-OF-SERVICE CRITERIA
Page Intentionally Left Blank
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
a. Fire Extinguisher (393.95)
Check for the presence of a fire extinguisher
and for the following:
1) Pressure: Check gauge.
2) Tag (Inspection Date): Check for the
presence of inspection sticker or tag
and inspection date
3) Mounting: Check for accessibility and
secure mounting.
4) Rating: Check for proper Underwriters
Laboratory (UL) rating.
Inspection sticker or tag will expire before next
scheduled inspection.
Bracket mount is loose.
(Continued on Next Page)
No fire extinguisher is on bus.
Pressure is above or below the green zone.
Tag or sticker is missing or does not verify
inspection was performed within the previous
12 months. Exception: Buses less than one
year old with original fire extinguisher do
not need a tag or sticker.
Fire extinguisher is not accessible to driver,
not mounted securely or mounted in a
lockable compartment not equipped with an
operational
ignition-warning
buzzer
or
interlock.
Rating is less than 2A-10BC.
A.
INSIDE BUS
1. Emergency Equipment
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
5) Nozzle/hose: Check for loose or
damaged parts.
6) Safety Pin: Check for presence of
safety
pin
and
breakable,
non-
reusable tamper seal.
b. First Aid Kit
1) Kit box and condition: A moisture and
dust-proof kit box is required for buses
built since 1985.
Check
for
the
presence
of
a
breakable, non-reusable tamper seal
for buses built since September 1995.
2) Mounting: Check accessibility and
mounting of kit. Kit should be mounted
in the driver’s area in such a manner
that it can be easily detached and
made portable.
NOTE: Must check kit contents if seal is
broken or missing (also see the NOTE on
page 3).
Tamper seal is broken, missing or reusable
(can be opened and resealed without
destroying the seal).
(Continued on Next Page)
Hose or nozzle is loose, missing or there is
excessive damage to any part of the
extinguisher.
Safety pin is missing and/or tamper seal is
broken.
Tamper seal cannot be broken by hand or is
reusable (can be opened and resealed
without destroying the seal).
Kit is not present; kit box is not moisture-proof
and dust-proof, will not stay latched and/or
cannot be opened.
Tamper seal cannot be broken by hand.
Kit is not secured, not mounted in the driver's
compartment, not easily detached or mounted
in a lockable compartment not equipped with
an operational ignition-warning buzzer or
interlock.
A. INSIDE BUS
1.
Emergency Equipment
BUSES MANUFACTURED FROM 1985 TO 2025
DESCRIPTION
QUANTITY
1” bandage compress (e.g., Band-Aid)
2 pkgs.
40” triangular bandage with two safety pins
1 pkg.
4” X 4” sterile gauze pads
6 pkgs.
of 2 each
2” rolled bandages 6 yards in length
1 pkg.
1” roll adhesive tape 2-1/2 yards in length
1 roll
Eye dressing packet
2 pkgs.
DESCRIPTION
QUANTITY
An Environmental Protection Agency
(EPA)-registered germicide (tuberculocidal)
disinfectant
A fully disposable wiping cloth
A water-resistant spatula
Step-by-step directions
Odor-counteracting absorbent material
Latex gloves
2 pairs
Towelettes
1 pkg.
A discard bag (non-labeled paper bag with
plastic liner and twist tie). This bag shall be
approximately 4x6x14 inch and be of a non-
safety color (i.e., not red, orange or yellow).
Note: In addition to scheduled inspections, all first aid and body
fluid cleanup kits should be opened and inspected annually to
check the condition and presence of contents according to A.1.
b. and c.
CHART 1: FIRST AID
KITS
CHART 1a: BODY FLUID CLEANUP
KIT
A. INSIDE
1.
Emergency Equipment
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
3) Contents: Check that all contents are
intact, have not deteriorated and are
sterile. (For contents list, see chart 1.)
c. Body Fluid Cleanup Kit
1) Kit
box
and
condition:
Buses
manufactured since 1992 require a
sealed kit.
Check for the presence of a breakable,
non-reusable tamper seal for all buses
manufactured since September 1995.
2) Mounting: Check accessibility and
mounting of kit. Kit should be mounted
in the driver’s area in such a manner
that it can be easily detached and
made portable.
3) Contents: Check that all contents are
intact, have not deteriorated and are
sealed. (For contents list, see chart 1a.)
Note: Must check kit contents if seal is
broken or missing.
Bandages are missing or incomplete.
Tamper seal is broken, missing or reusable
(can be opened and resealed without
destroying the seal).
(Continued on Next Page)
Contents are incomplete (except bandages),
improper
type
or
not
usable
due
to
contamination, age or deterioration.
Kit is not present or not sealed, or box will not
stay latched or cannot be opened.
Tamper seal cannot be broken by hand.
Kit is not secured, not mounted in the driver's
compartment, not easily detached without the
use of tools, or mounted in a lockable
compartment that is not equipped with an
operational
ignition-warning
buzzer
or
interlock.
Contents are incomplete or not usable due to
age and deterioration.
A. INSIDE
1.
Emergency Equipment
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
d. Reflectors (FMVSS 571.125)
1) Check for proper quantity, type and
condition
of
emergency
roadside
reflectors.
2) Check accessibility, mounting and
condition of storage box. Must be
securely mounted in driver’s area.
3) Check for the presence of a breakable,
non-reusable tamper seal for buses
manufactured since September 1995.
Tamper seal is broken, missing or reusable
(can be opened and resealed without
destroying the seal).
Not equipped with three self-standing, 17-inch
triangular reflectors or any of the reflectors, or
storage box is unusable due to age, damage
or deterioration.
Storage box is broken, will not remain latched,
is not easily accessible, is not securely
mounted
forward
of
the
passenger
compartment, or mounted in a lockable
compartment that is not equipped with an
operational ignition warning buzzer or inter-
lock.
Tamper seal cannot be broken by hand.
A. INSIDE
2.
Registration and Insurance Card
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
a. Insurance Card
Check for a valid insurance card.
Insurance card is invalid, missing or illegible.
A. INSIDE
3.
Shifter, Noise Abatement Switch and
Neutral Safety Switch
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
a. Shifter - Automatic Transmission
1) Check that shifter operates easily.
2) Check that correct transmission gear
range is indicated.
3) Check that shifter has a functional
detent mechanism and handle (ball,
knob or “T” type).
b. Shifter - With Shifter Park Brake Option
(if equipped). Same as above plus:
1) Check that parking brake applies
when shifter is placed in “P” (park)
position.
Transmission gear selector does not shift
easily into all gear ranges.
Indicator is slightly misaligned, but correctly
indicates the gear range selected.
Shifter handle is loose.
(Continued on Next Page)
Shifter will not select all gear ranges.
Indicator indicates the wrong gear range
selected.
Detent or handle is nonfunctional or missing.
Rear spring brake does not apply when shifter
is in the “P” (park) position.
Rear spring brake applies automatically in any
gear range except the “P” (park) position.
A. INSIDE
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
c. Noise Supression Switch (Required on
buses manufactured since 2026)
Inspect for proper operation. Switch must
deactivate all non-safety-essential noise-
making equipment.
d. Neutral Safety Switch
Check
to
determine
that
automatic
transmission bus has a functional neutral
safety switch that will allow the starter to
operate only in park or neutral.
Switch is not clearly labeled or not of an
alternate color.
Switch/System does not work or does not
deactivate required items such as AM/FM
radio and CD player, heaters, defrosters, fans
and air conditioners.
Switch/System deactivates safety-essential
items such as windshield wipers and lighting
systems.
The starter will engage when automatic
transmission is in any gear other than park or
neutral.
3.
Shifter, Noise Suppression Switch
and Neutral Safety Switch
A. INSIDE
4.
Engine Controls
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
a. Key/Ignition Switch
1) Check that ignition switch operates
with a key only.
2) Must be mounted securely in the
Original OEM location.
3) Must freely select to all positions, i.e.,
start, run, off and accessory position.
(Continued on Next Page)
Key sticks in the switch, switch can be
operated without a key or bus is equipped with
a push button or non-original equipment
manufacturer (OEM) starting device.
Switch is loose or not mounted in the OEM
location.
Switch does not function properly in start, run,
off or accessory position; is intermittent in any
position; or sticks in or between any positions.
A. INSIDE
4.
Engine Controls
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
b. Accelerator
1) Check condition of pedal assembly,
mounting and securement.
2) Inspect pedal assembly, wiring and
connectors for condition and loose or
missing hardware. Mechanical linkage
must have dual (two) return springs.
3) Check for smooth operation of pedal
assembly
and
linkage
in
the
accelerating and coast position.
Pedal cover worn but not causing a slippery
pedal condition.
Pedal cover is worn badly or missing. Pedal
assembly is modified or not mounted securely
in the OEM location.
Pedal assembly is not operating properly;
wiring is loose, damaged or improperly routed;
hardware is loose or missing; or mechanical
type of linkage is loose, damaged or not
equipped with dual return springs.
Accelerator control and/or linkage sticks or
does not operate freely.
A. INSIDE
5.
Gauges, Indicators, Dash and Switch
Panel Lights, Engine Warning
Lights/Buzzers and ABS Warning Light
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
a. Gauges
From the driver’s position, check the visibility,
OEM
location,
readability,
operation,
accuracy and condition of the following
gauges:
1) Speedometer and odometer
2) Engine oil pressure, temperature and
transmission temperature
3) Fuel
4) Voltmeter or ammeter
Odometer is unreadable, does not work or is
not working properly.
Oil
pressure
or temperature
gauge
is
inaccurate or difficult to read.
Fuel gauge is inaccurate or difficult to read.
Voltmeter or ammeter is inaccurate, damaged
or difficult to read.
(Continued on Next Page)
Speedometer is unreadable, damaged, does
not function or is confirmed to be inaccurate.
Oil pressure or engine and transmission
temperature gauge is unreadable, damaged
or does not function.
Fuel gauge is unreadable, damaged or does
not function.
Voltmeter or ammeter does not work or does
not indicate that alternator is charging. Refer
to C.5.f. on page 106.
A. INSIDE
5.
Gauges, Indicators, Dash and Switch
Panel Lights, Engine Warning
Lights/Buzzers and ABS Warning Light
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
5) Air pressure or vacuum.
6) Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) level
gauge.
b. Indicators, Dash Lights and Switch
Panel Lighting
Check operation of indicators, dash lights and
switch panel lighting.
DEF gauge is inaccurate, damaged or difficult
to read.
Any illuminated indicator, dash item or switch
does not light except for items listed to the
right in the “Out-of-Service” column.
Dimmer control (if equipped) does not function
properly.
Air pressure or vacuum gauge(s) are
inaccurate, unreadable or not working. Air
pressure gauge must read within plus or
minus seven pounds per square inch (psi)
(single gauge) at 100 psi.
DEF gauge does not work or is not present.
Any one of the following fails to illuminate:
1) Air or vacuum gauge or associated low
warning lights
2) High-beam headlight indicator
3) Left/right turn signal and
four-way hazard dash indicators
4) Speedometer
5) Shift Indicator
All dash or control panel lights are inoperative.
(Continued on Next Page)
A. INSIDE
5.
Gauges, Indicators, Dash and Switch
Panel Lights, Engine Warning
Lights/Buzzers and ABS Warning Light
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
c. Engine/Transmission Warning Lights
and Buzzer
Check for presence and operation of the
following warning lights and audible alarms:
1) Coolant temperature dash warning
light and alarm on diesel buses
Coolant temperature dash warning light
and/or alarm is inoperative.
2) Transmission
temperature
dash
warning light and alarm
Transmission temperature light and/or alarm
is inoperative.
3) Low oil pressure, dash warning light
and alarm on diesel buses
Low oil pressure, dash warning light and/or
alarm is inoperative.
Any of the above lights are on, indicating a
critical mechanical condition.
d. ABS Warning Light
Check condition of ABS warning lamp and
system (if equipped). Refer to applicable
vehicle
technical
publication
for
test
procedures and diagnostic information.
Lamp fails to turn on during initial startup
sequence.
Lamp fails to turn off.
System fails to operate per manufacturer's
specifications.
A. INSIDE
6.
Air Brake System
Note: Chock bus wheels when inspection procedures require the service, parking and/or emergency brakes to be in the released
position.
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
a. Gauge(s)
Check for presence of two air pressure
gauges or a single gauge with dual needles.
One gauge or needle should indicate air
pressure available to the front air brake
system, and the other should indicate air
pressure available to the rear air brake
system. Both gauges must be accurate to
within plus or minus 7 psi at a system
pressure of 100 psi.
b. Buildup
Drain air reservoir thoroughly before making
this check. Check the time required for air
pressure to build up from 85 to 100 psi with
engine at approximately 1,200 revolutions per
minute (RPM).
Note: If air brake gauge(s) failed inspection
step a. of this section, make necessary
repairs prior to performing the test in step
b.
(Continued on Next Page)
Any gauge is missing or unreadable. Gauge
is not accurate to within plus or minus 7 psi at
a system pressure of 100 psi. Any gauge is
not in OEM location. More than 15-psi
difference in dual air brake system (dual
gauges) with system built up to full pressure
(100-125 psi).
Air pressure buildup time from 85 to 100 psi at
fast idle is greater than 40 seconds.
393.48(a), 396.3(a)(1), 393.3(a)(1), 393.47(b),
393.47(c),
571.121,
393.48,
393.3(a)(1),
393.45(a), 393.41, 571.105 S5.2.1 and
s5.2.3(b)©
A. INSIDE
6.
Air Brake System
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
c. Governor
Check air brake system governor operation.
While building up system air pressure, note
pressure
at
which
governor
cuts
out
(compressor quits compressing). With engine
still running, pump brakes to lower air pressure
until compressor cuts in (starts compressing
again). Note pressure.
Note: If gauge(s) failed previous check for
accuracy, do not perform this check until
gauge(s) are repaired.
d. Park/Emergency Brake
Check condition, mounting and location of
park/emergency brake valve, proper release
and application of park/emergency brake and
interlock(s) operation (if equipped).
With parking/emergency brake applied and
service brake released, apply engine torque by
placing transmission selector in “Drive” (D)
and
briefly
accelerate
the
engine
to
approximately 1200 RPM. Vehicle should not
move forward.
NOTE: If a bus is equipped with a rear
diesel engine and an Allison World
transmission, perform this test at
approximately 900 RPM.
Cut-out pressure is below 120 psi (for buses
equipped with air dryer).
Valve labeling is missing or unreadable.
.
(Continued on Next Page)
Cut-out pressure is too low (below 100 psi) or
too high (above 130 psi).
Difference between governor cut-out and cut-
in pressure exceeds 30 psi.
Valve not mounted securely in original
position; knob is missing, broken or cracked;
park/emergency brake does not release
and/or apply properly; or interlock(s) (if
equipped) do not function properly.
Vehicle moves forward upon applying engine
torque with park/emergency brake applied and
service brake released.
393.48(a), 396.3(a)(1), 393.3(a)(1), 393.47(b),
393.47(c),
571.121,
393.48,
393.3(a)(1),
393.45(a), 393.41, 571.105 S5.2.1 and
s5.2.3(b)©
A. INSIDE
6.
Air Brake System
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
e. Adjustment
Drain water from air reservoir(s). With engine
off,
wheels
chocked,
service
and
park/emergency brakes released and system
air pressure at 100 psi or above:
1) Note air pressure.
2) Apply
service
brakes
firmly
and
release immediately.
2) Note air pressure drop resulting from
brake application.
Note: If gauge(s) failed previous check for
accuracy, do not perform this check until
after repairs.
Note: Pressure drop exceeding 15 psi
indicates brakes may be out of adjustment,
foundation brake hardware may be worn
out or damaged, and/or there is excessive
water in the air reservoir(s).
Note: Do NOT manually adjust automatic
slack adjuster (ASA) type brakes during
inspections. See sections D.2. "Front
Brake," and D.10. "Rear Brake," for
additional information.
(Continued on Next Page)
System pressure drop upon service brake
application is greater than 15 psi.
Note: If pressure drop exceeds 15 psi,
mark item A. 6. "Out-of-Service" and follow
the inspection procedures in sections D. 2.,
"Front Brake," and D. 10, "Rear Brake."
Note: Adjust Manual Slack Adjuster (MSA)-
equipped
brakes
at
every
required
inspection.
393.48(a), 396.3(a)(1), 393.3(a)(1), 393.47(b),
393.47(c),
571.121,
393.48,
393.3(a)(1),
393.45(a), 393.41, 571.105 S5.2.1 and
s5.2.3(b)©
A. INSIDE
6.
Air Brake System
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
f. Air Leaks
1) Build up air system to at least 100 psi.
2) Shut off engine, chock wheels and
release the parking brake.
3) With service and parking brakes in
released
position,
check
for
air
pressure drop for one minute. Note
pressure drop, if any.
4) Firmly apply and hold service brake.
Check for air pressure drop for one
minute. Note pressure drop, if any.
5) During both checks, listen for any
audible air leaks.
Note: If gauge(s) failed previous check for
accuracy, do not perform this test until
gauge(s) is repaired.
Pressure drops less than two psi per minute.
Pressure drops less than three psi per minute.
(Continued on Next Page)
Pressure drops two or more psi per minute.
Pressure drops three or more psi per minute.
There is any audible air leak in the air brake
system.
393.48(a), 396.3(a)(1), 393.3(a)(1), 393.47(b),
393.47(c), 571.121, 393.48, 393.3(a)(1),
393.45(a), 393.41, 571.105 S5.2.1 and
s5.2.3(b)©
A. INSIDE
6.
Air Brake System
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
g. Low Air Warning
Check operation of low-air warning buzzer and
light by building air pressure to 100-125 psi.
Shut down engine and perform the following
procedure:
1) Turn ignition to the on position and
pump brake pedal to drop air pressure.
The low-air warning buzzer and light
must not activate above 75 psi and
must activate by 50 psi.
2) Start engine and build up air pressure.
The low-air warning buzzer and light
must deactivate by 75 psi.
Note: If gauge(s) failed previous check for
accuracy, do not perform this check until
gauge(s) is repaired.
(Continued on Next Page)
Light or buzzer is inoperative.
While dropping the air pressure, light and/or
buzzer activates above 75 psi or fails to
activate by 50 psi.
While building pressure, light and/or buzzer
continues to activate above 75 psi.
393.48(a), 396.3(a)(1), 393.3(a)(1), 393.47(b),
393.47(c),
571.121,
393.48,
393.3(a)(1),
393.45(a), 393.41, 571.105 S5.2.1 and
s5.2.3(b)©
A. INSIDE
6.
Air Brake System
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
h. Park/Emergency Brake Valve Pop-Out
Check
for
emergency
activation
of
park/emergency brake valve by dropping air
pressure (starting with at least 60 psi in air
system) and noting pressure at which valve
“pops out.”
i.
Service Brake Pedal
Check service brake pedal assembly for
adjustment, mounting, condition, operation
and rubber cover pad. Check for presence of
prohibited
modifications
and/or
extender
block.
Rubber cover pad is worn, but not causing a
slippery pedal condition.
While
dropping
air
pressure,
valve
automatically “pops out” above 50 psi or fails
to “pop out” between 50 and 15 psi.
Rubber cover pad is missing or badly worn.
Any part of pedal and assembly is damaged,
loose, missing or modified.
Pedal has any type of extender block.
393.48(a), 396.3(a)(1), 393.3(a)(1), 393.47(b),
393.47(c), 571.121, 393.48, 393.3(a)(1),
393.45(a), 393.41, 571.105 S5.2.1 and
s5.2.3(b)©
A. INSIDE
7.
Hydraulic Brakes
Note: Several inspection procedures outlined in this manual require the service, parking and/or emergency brakes in the released
position. When performing these checks, bus wheels must be chocked to prevent the bus from moving.
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
Note:
If bus is not equipped with
hydraulic brakes, proceed to
the next page.
393.51(b), 393.45(a), 571.106, 393.48(a)©,
393.40(b)©, 393.3(a)(1)©, 571.105 S5.2.1 and
S5.2.3(b), 393.47(a)(g), 393.48(a), 393.47(d)©
Since there are four distinct types of hydraulic brake systems in use on Mississippi school buses, this manual will cover each system
individually. It is imperative that you know the type of system you will be inspecting to ensure that the proper inspection procedure is used.
The four types of systems are:
a. Standard Vacuum Assisted Hydraulic Brakes
b. Hydraulic Power Assisted Hydraulic Brake with Accumulator Backup
c. Hydraulic Power Assisted Hydraulic Brakes with Electric Pump Backup and Driveshaft Parking Brake Systems
d. Hydraulic Power Assisted Hydraulic Brakes with Spring Set (hydraulically released) Parking Brakes (Ford Maxi-brake(s))
(Continued on Next Page)
A. INSIDE
7.
Hydraulic Brakes
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
a. Standard Vacuum Assisted Hydraulic
Brakes. Inspect for:
1) Any visible seepage or leaks in the
hydraulic brake system.
2) a) Brake pedal reserve (distance from
floor) upon firm brake application
(engine running).
b) Brake pedal fade (pedal falls to floor
when held down with engine
running and with engine off)
indicating brake system leak.
3) a)
Vacuum
gauge
operation
(if
equipped)
and
low
vacuum
indicator light and buzzer (if
equipped) with full vacuum below
eight inches of mercury (hg).
(Continued on Next Page)
Any seepage or leaks are found.
Brake pedal (reserve) is less than one inch
from floor.
Any brake pedal fade is felt.
Vacuum gauge (if equipped) is inoperative,
inaccurate or not clearly visible.
Low vacuum indicator light and buzzer do not
come on below eight inches of mercury (hg).
A. INSIDE
7.
Hydraulic Brakes
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
b) Brake warning light illumination
with ignition key in start position.
Check to ensure brake failure
warning light is not on during
normal operation (with and without
brakes applied).
c) Vacuum drop while engine is off
and brakes are not applied.
4) Vacuum Assist Booster Operation
With engine off, apply brakes several
times to exhaust vacuum. Depress and
hold the brake pedal down while
starting the engine. Pedal should fall
away slightly, indicating increased
pressure being applied by the assist
unit.
5) Sufficient reserve in the vacuum
system to allow at least one power-
assisted brake application. Check this
by turning the engine off and applying
the brakes.
(Continued on Next Page)
Brake failure warning light does not activate
when key is moved to the start position.
Brake failure warning light comes on (or stays
on) during normal operation (with or without
brakes applied).
Vacuum reserve drops while engine is off.
Vacuum assist system malfunctions (pedal
does not fall away slightly when engine is
started.)
Vacuum reserve is insufficient to allow at least
one brake application.
A. INSIDE
7.
Hydraulic Brakes
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
6) All brake hardware components inside
bus for secure mounting, routing and
condition, including:
a) Brake pedal assembly and rubber
cover (if originally equipped).
b) Emergency brake control
assembly.
7) Parking Brake Operation
With parking brake applied and service
brake released, apply engine torque by
placing transmission selector in “D”
and briefly accelerate the engine to
approximately 1,200 RPM. Vehicle
should not move forward.
Rubber cover is worn, but not causing a
slippery pedal condition.
(Continued on Next Page)
Brake pedal assembly, push-rod and clevis or
emergency
brake
control
assembly
is
insecurely mounted; poorly routed; has loose,
missing or worn hardware; or is damaged.
Rubber cover pad is missing or badly worn.
Any part of pedal and assembly is damaged,
loose, missing or modified.
Pedal has any type of extender block.
Emergency brake control is hard to operate or
does not latch and release properly.
Vehicle moves forward upon applying engine
torque with park brake applied and service
brake released.
A. INSIDE
7.
Hydraulic Brakes
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
b. Hydraulic Power Assisted Hydraulic
Brakes with Accumulator Backup.
Inspect for:
1) Visible seepage or leaks in the brake
or hydraulic assist systems.
2) a) Brake pedal reserve (distance from
floor)
upon
one
firm
brake
application
(engine
off,
accumulator depleted).
b) Brake pedal fade (test for at least
one and a half minutes with the
engine off). Firmly apply brake
pedal and hold.
3) Brake warning light illumination with
ignition key in start position. Check to
ensure brake failure warning light is not
on during normal operation (with and
without brakes applied).
(Continued on Next Page)
Any brake or hydraulic assist fluid is seeping
or leaking.
Brake pedal does not have at least a one and
a half inch of reserve distance from floor.
Pedal falls to floor (fades) when held down
(engine off), indicating a brake system leak.
Brake failure warning light does not activate
when key is turned to the start position or stays
on during normal operation.
A. INSIDE
7.
Hydraulic Brakes
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
4) Power assist check:
a) With engine off, apply the foot
brake several times, and then hold
the brake pedal down.
b) Start the engine.
c) The pedal should fall away, then
push back, against your foot.
d) Listen for engine drive belt squeal.
e) Release brake pedal.
f) Turn engine off.
g) Depress brake pedal. Accumulator
should hold enough pressure to
allow
two
assisted
brake
applications.
5) All brake hardware components inside
bus for secure mounting, routing and
condition, including:
(Continued on Next Page)
Power assist unit is malfunctioning (pedal
does not fall away or push back).
Engine drive belt is squealing.
Accumulator will not hold enough pressure for
two brake applications.
Brake pedal assembly, push-rod, clevis or
emergency
brake
control
assembly
is
insecurely mounted; poorly routed; has loose,
missing or worn hardware; or is damaged.
A. INSIDE
7.
Hydraulic Brakes
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
a) Brake pedal assembly and rubber
cover pad (if originally equipped).
b) Emergency brake control
assembly.
6) Parking Brake Operation
With parking brake applied and service
brake released, apply engine torque by
placing transmission selector in “D”
and briefly accelerate the engine to
approximately 1,200 RPM. Vehicle
should not move forward.
Rubber cover pad is worn, but not causing a
slippery pedal condition.
(Continued on Next Page)
Rubber cover pad is missing or badly worn.
Any part of pedal and assembly is damaged,
loose, missing or modified.
Pedal has any type of extender block.
Emergency brake control is hard to operate or
does not latch and release properly.
Vehicle moves forward upon applying engine
torque with park brake applied and service
brake released.
A. INSIDE
7.
Hydraulic Brakes
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
c. Hydraulic Power Assisted Hydraulic
Brakes with electric pump backup and
driveshaft
parking
brake
system.
Inspect for:
1) Visible seepage or leaks in the brake
or hydraulic assist system.
2) Brake warning and backup systems
using
the
appropriate
chassis
manufacturer’s procedure in chart 2.
3) a) Brake pedal distance from floor
(reserve) upon one firm brake
application with engine off and
hydraulic boost depleted.
b) Brake pedal fade (continues to fall
to floor after initial firm application)
with engine off.
6) All brake hardware components inside
bus for secure mounting, routing and
condition, including:
(Continued on Next Page)
Any brake or hydraulic assist fluid is seeping
or leaking.
The brake system does not pass all tests in
chart 2.
Brake pedal reserve is less than one inch from
floor.
Any brake pedal fade is felt.
Brake pedal assembly, push-rod, clevis or
emergency
brake
control
assembly
is
insecurely mounted; poorly routed; has loose,
missing or worn hardware; or is damaged.
A. INSIDE
7.
Hydraulic Brakes
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
a) Brake pedal assembly and rubber
cover pad (if originally equipped).
b) Emergency brake control
assembly.
5) Parking Brake Operation
With parking brake applied and service
brake released, apply engine torque by
placing transmission selector in “D”
and briefly accelerate the engine to
approximately 1,200 RPM. Vehicle
should not move forward.
Rubber cover pad is worn, but not causing a
slippery pedal condition.
(Continued on Next Page)
Rubber cover pad is missing or badly worn.
Any part of pedal and assembly is damaged,
loose, missing or modified.
Pedal has any type of extender block.
Emergency brake control is hard to operate or
does not latch and release properly.
Vehicle moves forward upon applying engine
torque with park brake applied and service
brake released.
A. INSIDE
7.
Hydraulic Brakes
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
d. Hydraulic Power Assisted Hydraulic
Brakes with Spring Set (hydraulically
released) Parking Brakes (Ford Maxi
brake). Inspect for:
1) Visible seepage or leaks in the brake
or power assist system.
2) Brake warning and backup system
using chart 3.
3) Brake pedal travel: Push brake pedal
down as far as possible.
4) Brake pedal fade (pedal falls away to
floor when held down with engine
running and with engine off, indicating
brake system leaks).
5) Parking Brake Operation
a) With engine running, release the
parking brake.
b) Check to be sure brakes are
released (bus will move).
(Continued on Next Page)
Any brake or hydraulic assist fluid is seeping
or leaking.
The brake systems do not pass all tests in
chart 3.
Brake pedal travels more than halfway down.
Any brake pedal fade is felt.
A. INSIDE
7.
Hydraulic Brakes
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
c) Turn engine off.
d) System must maintain pressure
(keep parking brake released) for
at least five minutes.
e) With parking brake applied and
service
brake released,
apply
engine
torque
by
placing
transmission selector in “D” and
briefly accelerate the engine to
approximately 1,200 RPM. Vehicle
should not move forward.
6) Check
all
brake
hardware
and
components inside the bus for secure
mounting,
routing
and
condition,
including:
a) Brake pedal assembly and rubber
cover pad (if originally equipped).
b) Emergency brake control
assembly.
Rubber cover pad is worn but not causing a
slippery pedal condition.
Parking brake system will not hold pressure
(i.e., release brakes) for at least five minutes.
Vehicle moves forward upon applying engine
torque with park brake applied and service
brake released.
Brake pedal assembly, push-rod, clevis or
emergency
brake
control
assembly
is
insecurely mounted; poorly routed; has loose,
missing or worn hardware; or is damaged.
Rubber cover pad is missing or badly worn.
Any part of pedal and assembly is damaged,
loose, missing or modified. Pedal has any type
of extender block.
Emergency brake control is hard to operate or
does not latch and release properly.
CHART 2
FORD
WARNING LIGHTS/BUZZER
Normal Operation
MODE
Indicator
Brake
Lamp
Brake
Electric
Motor
Lamp
Buzzer
1a. Engine
Off/Ignition
Off/no
brake applied
Off
Off
Off
1b. Engine Off/Ignition Off/brake
applied
Off
On
On
2.
Engine Off/Ignition On or start
with or without brake applied
On
On
On
3.
Engine On, with or without
brake applied
Off
Off
Off
GMC
MODE
Normal Operation
Brake
Warning
Light
Brake Electric
Hydraulic
Boost Warning
Light
Tone
Alarm
1. Engine off/ignition off
A. No brake applied
B. Brake applied
Off
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
2. Engine off/ignition
on,
with
or without
brake
applied (bulb check).
On
On
On
3. Engine
off/ignition
on.
Start with or without brake
applied.
On
Off
On
4. Engine on, with or without
brake applied.
Off
Off
Off
Brake Failure Warning System Checks
INTERNATIONAL/NAVISTAR
CONDITION
NORMAL
OPERATION
PARK BRAKE LIGHT
Key switch in start position with
park brake released - (bulb
check).
Light on
Key switch on with park brake
applied.
Light on
BRAKE PRESSURE LIGHT
Key switch off.
Light off. Electric hydraulic pump
operates when service brakes are
applied.
Key switch in on position. Engine
not running (pump and bulb
check).
Light on and electric hydraulic
pump
operation
(some
vehicles). See Navistar manual.
Light on and electric hydraulic
pump operates when service brakes
are applied.
Key switch in on position and
engine operating with service
brakes applied.
Light off
Key switch in start position.
Light comes on momentarily and
electric hydraulic pump operates.
Key switch in on position and
engine operating with service
brakes applied.
Light off
CHART 3
FORD HYDRAULIC, MAXI BRAKE SYSTEM
NORMAL BRAKE SYSTEM CONDITIONS
CONTROLS
RESULTS
ENGINE
IGNITION
SERVICE
BRAKE
PARKING BRAKE
SERVICE
BRAKE
*ELECTRIC PUMP
PARKING BRAKE
OFF
ON
LIGHT
LIGHT
BUZZER
LIGHT
**BUZZER
OF
F
ON
OF
F
O
N
START
OF
F
o
r
O
N
RELEASED
APPLIED
OF
F
O
N
OF
F
O
N
OF
F
O
N
OF
F
O
N
OF
F
ON
PARTIALLY
FULLY
PARTIALLY
FULLY
X
X
X
X
or
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
or
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
o
r
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
o
r
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
o
r
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
o
r
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
o
r
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
o
r
X
X
X
X
X
X
* Whenever the ignition switch is in the start position, the Hydro-Max electric pump will cycle momentarily.
** Parking brake buzzer will sound momentarily during application of the parking brake in cold ambient conditions.
A. INSIDE
8.
Windshield Wipers and Washers
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
393.78, FMVSS 571.104, 393.60(c)
a. Operation
Inspect both wipers for:
1) Swept
area
field
of
view
and
effectiveness of wiping.
2) Proper operation on high and low
speeds,
intermittent
function
(if
equipped), condition, and mounting of
switches and knobs.
3) Condition and mounting of wiper motors
and linkage.
4) Proper washer operation.
b. Park
Inspect for parked position of wipers when
turned off (electric) or when manually
parked (air).
c. Blades
Inspect blades for condition, mounting and
tension.
Wiper does not operate on low speed,
intermittent function (if equipped) does not
work properly or wiper goes past perimeter of
glass.
Washer nozzle is misadjusted.
Poor cleaning of windshield.
Any wiper does not operate properly at high
speed or switches or knobs are missing or
loose.
Either wiper motor or linkage is visibly
damaged, loose or excessively worn.
Windshield washer is inoperable.
Electric wipers do not automatically return to
parked position out of the driver’s line of sight
when turned off, or air wipers cannot be
manually parked out of the driver’s line of sight.
Either
blade
is
missing,
damaged,
deteriorated, loose, does not hold proper
tension against windshield or does not
effectively clear driver’s field of vision.
A. INSIDE
9.
Heaters, Defrosters, Auxiliary Dash or
Heater Fan(s), Air Conditioner
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
a. Heaters
Inspect heater system for performance,
operation and condition.
Coolant control valve is hard to operate.
Any blower does not work on all speeds, is
noisy or vibrates, or switches are loose or
improperly labeled.
(Continued on Next Page)
System is not producing heat.
Any blower is extremely noisy, indicating
imminent failure, or system wiring and
connections are loose, damaged or chafed,
creating an electrical short or high resistance.
Heater hoses are cracked, swollen or badly
chafed, or there is any coolant leakage inside
the bus.
Hose and/or component shielding is missing or
does not completely cover hoses/components
in a manner that protects passengers from
contact with hot surfaces and prevents
spraying of coolant in the event of a
hose/component failure.
Any
portion
of
heating
system
within
passenger
area
creates
sharp
edges,
projections or other hazards to passengers.
A. INSIDE
9.
Heaters, Defrosters, Auxiliary Dash or
Heater Fan(s), Air Conditioner
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
571.103
b. Defrosters
Inspect defroster system for performance,
operation and condition.
Any blower does not work on low speed or is
noisy or vibrates, or switches are loose or
improperly labeled.
Any ductwork or diffusers are loose or
damaged, but can still effectively route airflow.
Fresh air control (if equipped) does not
function.
(Continued on Next Page)
Any blower is extremely noisy, indicating
imminent failure, or system wiring and
connections are loose, damaged or chafed,
creating an electrical short or high resistance.
Airflow is not present at all defroster outlets, or
system does not produce adequate heat.
Any defroster blower does not work on high
speed.
Any ductwork or diffusers are damaged,
rendering them ineffective.
Any portion of defroster system within
passenger
area
creates
sharp
edges,
projections or other hazards to passengers.
A. INSIDE
9.
Heaters, Defrosters, Auxiliary Dash or
Heater Fan(s), Air Conditioner
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
c. Auxiliary Dash Fan (if equipped)
Inspect fan for performance, operation and
condition.
Note: Dash fan may be squirrel cage type
and header-mounted on some buses.
d. Passenger Air Conditioning
Inspect air conditioner for performance,
operation, and condition.
Note: See Bus Air Conditioning Preventive
Maintenance Work Sheet.
Fan does not work on low speed, is noisy or
vibrates, or switches are loose or improperly
labeled.
Any blower does not work on low speed or is
noisy or vibrates, or switches are loose or
improperly labeled.
Fan is extremely noisy, indicating imminent
failure or wiring or connections are loose,
damaged or chafed, creating an electrical
short or high resistance.
Fan is missing, loose, or will not stay adjusted.
Protective cage is missing, loose or damaged.
Fan does not operate.
Any blower is extremely noisy, indicating
imminent failure, or system wiring and
connections are loose, damaged or chafed,
creating an electrical short or high resistance.
Any portion of the evaporator system within
the passenger compartment area creates
sharp edges, projections or other hazards to
passengers.
A. INSIDE BUS
10. Dome and Step Well Lights
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
571.108, 571.131
Dome and Step Well Lights
Check passenger and driver dome lights for
condition and operation. A driver dome light
has been required since September 1995.
Check step well lights for condition and
operation.
Any lens is cracked or dirty.
Any single passenger dome light is not
working.
Dome light switch is loosely mounted.
Step well light is on when door is closed.
Lens is cracked or dirty.
Any lens is broken or missing, exposing light
bulb or fixture.
Two or more passenger dome lights are not
working.
Any driver’s compartment dome light is not
working.
Step well light does not activate when
clearance lights are on and the service door is
open.
A. INSIDE BUS
11. Service Door
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
a. Operation
Check service door assembly for operation,
adjustment, condition, mounting and fit.
(Continued on Next Page)
Service door binds, will not open a minimum of
24 inches or is unsecured in the closed
position.
Manual door control requires more than 25
pounds of effort to open or close.
Manual door control will not lock open over
center, or closed latching mechanism is
inoperative.
Service door emergency release does not
function properly.
Service door opens or closes at an excessive
rate and force or too slowly.
Air door system leaks air.
Glass is broken, cracked or has been replaced
with material other than laminated or tempered
safety glass.
Door glass is fogged more than one inch in
from edges, or visibility through the glass is
poor.
Door is equipped with a locking system that is
not OEM factory approved.
A. INSIDE BUS
11. Service Door
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
b. Overhead Pad
Check bus for a padded safety cushion directly
above the inside of the service door. Pad is
required to be a minimum of three inches wide.
Door does not seal properly or seals are
damaged, ripped or deteriorated.
Pad is loose or cover has minor damage or
wear.
Door assembly is damaged, not securely
mounted or has excessively worn hinges, pins,
bearings/bushings or other components.
Door seals are not present.
Pad is missing or cover has excessive damage
or wear, exposing foam.
A. INSIDE
12. Horns
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
Horns – 393.81
Check for operation of both horns while
rotating steering wheel left and right and check
for location and condition of horn switch.
Either horn is inoperative or both horns sound
the same note.
Horns are not audible at 500 feet.
Horn button is not mounted in OEM location.
Horn button sticks or horn button operates
intermittently, such as when steering wheel is
rotated.
A. INSIDE
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
a. Rear-View
Mirror
System
(Traffic
Mirrors) – 571.111
Check exterior (flat and convex) rear-view
mirrors for specifications, condition and
adjustment.
Electrically controlled mirror (if applicable) is
not operating properly and can still be adjusted
manually.
(Continued on Next Page)
Any required rear-view mirror is not present.
Rear-view mirrors cannot be adjusted.
Any mirror is cracked, broken or has reflective
surface deterioration; view is diminished; or
any damage is visible.
Any
mirror
does
not
meet
applicable
specifications.
Any rear-view mirror is out of adjustment. (If in
doubt, consult with operations supervisors
and/or driver trainers).
13. Mirror Adjustment and Condition
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
b. Cross/Side-View Mirror System (Cross-
walk Mirrors) 571.111
Check
cross-walk/side-view
mirrors
for
applicable
specifications,
condition
and
adjustment.
(Continued on Next Page)
Any required cross-walk/side-view mirror is
not present.
Any mirror is cracked, broken or has reflective
surface deterioration; view is diminished; or
any damage is visible.
Any
mirror
does
not
meet
applicable
specifications.
Any cross-walk/side-view mirror is out of
adjustment, i.e., mirrors do not provide driver
with an indirect view of the area at ground level
from the front bumper forward, including the
entire width of the bus and around the left and
right front corners so that the driver can see by
direct vision, and/or does not provide driver
with indirect vision of the area at ground level,
to include the tires and service entrance on all
types of buses so that view overlaps with the
rear-view mirror system. (If in doubt, consult
with operations supervisors and/or driver
trainers).
A. INSIDE BUS
13. Mirror Adjustment and Condition
A. INSIDE BUS
13. Mirror Adjustment and
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
c. Interior Mirror – 571.111
Check
interior
mirror
for
specifications,
condition and adjustment.
Interior mirror is not present.
Mirror is cracked, broken or has reflective
surface deterioration; or view is diminished by
distortion, stickers or other items.
Interior rearview mirror is not at least 6 inches
x 30 inches (except Type A, which shall be a
minimum of 50 square inches).
Mirror does not have rounded corners and
protected edges.
Mirror or mounting/adjusting system is loose
or cannot be adjusted by the driver.
A. INSIDE BUS
14. Driver’s Seat and Seat Belt
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
Driver’s Seat and Belt – 393.91, 393.93(a)(b),
571.209
Inspect driver’s seat and belt for specifications,
condition, mounting and operation.
Buses manufactured since 1989 require high
back seat with cloth insert and a three-point
shoulder harness/lap belt assembly.
Air suspension seat required on all air brake
equipped buses since September 1995.
The chassis manufacturer’s standard seat is
acceptable for Type A buses.
Note: The seat must have a minimum of
seven (7) inches fore and aft travel and a
minimum of four (4) inches up and down
travel.
For
complete
driver’s
seat
specifications, please see the Mississippi
School Bus Minimum Specifications and
Standards
manual.
Seat adjustments are stiff but still operational.
Seat upholstery or foam is deteriorated or
damaged.
Driver’s seat belt retractor cover is loose or
missing.
Driver’s seat will not adjust up, down, forward,
and back (see note), and lock in position with
driver in the seated, belted position; seat back
will not tilt and lock into position; or adjustment
hardware is loose, missing or damaged.
Seat assembly is unstable, cracked, damaged
or loose at floor; mounting hardware is missing
or not OEM or equivalent; or seat bottom or
back is loose, or frame is exposed due to
deterioration of upholstery or foam.
If equipped, seat suspension system is leaking
air.
Wrong
type
of
seat,
not
meeting
specifications, has been installed.
Driver’s seat belt is missing; is wrong type (i.e.,
not manufacturer’s standard for year, make
and model of bus); belt guides are insecure,
damaged or not operating properly; belt is
loose or routed improperly or does not extend
or retract freely; buckle-and-tongue assembly
does not latch or release properly; or seat belt
is frayed or damaged.
A. INSIDE BUS
15. Passenger Seats
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
Frames - 393.91, 393.93(a)(b), 571.209
a.
Inspect passenger seat frames for condition,
hardware and modifications.
Check for presence of non-OEM seat frames.
b. Mounting
Inspect condition of passenger seat mounting.
(Continued on Next Page)
Any seat frame tubing or welds are broken or
cracked; any frame has been repaired,
modified
or
reinforced
using
non-OEM
approved hardware or methods or projections;
or sharp edges exist.
Any non-OEM seat frames have been
installed.
Mounting at floor or seat rail is loose;
components are cracked, broken or damaged;
or any fasteners are missing, damaged or not
OEM or equivalent.
A. INSIDE BUS
15. Passenger Seats
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
c. Backs/Restraining
Barriers/Modesty
Panels/Padding - 393.91, 393.93(a)(b), 571.209
Inspect
seat
back,
restraining
barriers,
modesty panels and padding for specifications
and condition.
Up to early 2007 models: Standard
height
padded
seat
backs,
approximately
inches
high
measured from the seat bottom
cushion.
Early 2007 to present year models:
High-back
padded
seat
backs,
approximately
inches
high
measured from the seat bottom
cushion.
(Continued on Next Page)
Any bus manufactured since April 1977 does
not have a properly spaced and padded
restraining barrier/modesty panel forward of
any passenger seat without another seat
directly ahead.
Any modesty panel is missing, excessively
loose or damaged, causing sharp edges or
pinch points.
Original thickness or density of any seat back
or restraining barrier foam has been reduced
due to wear, damage, deterioration or other
factors so that there is no padding between
any portion of seat back frame and covering.
Any seat back or restraining barrier foam is the
wrong type (i.e., not manufacturer standard for
year, make and model of bus).
A. INSIDE BUS
15. Passenger Seats
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
d. Bottoms
1) Inspect seat bottoms for securement
and condition.
2) Inspect
automatic
retracting
seat
bottom at side emergency door for
proper operation, if equipped. Must
have clear access to emergency door,
with a minimum aisle width of 12
inches between seats.
(Continued on Next Page)
Any seat bottom is not attached to its seat
frame, or tilt-up bottoms will not latch or stay
latched in the closed position.
Original thickness or density of any seat
bottom cushion is reduced due to wear,
damage, deterioration or other factors so that
there is no padding between any portion of
seat bottom frame and covering.
Any seat bottom has a protruding edge or its
plywood is broken.
Any automatically retracting seat bottom will
not fold down, automatically retract and stay in
position when not occupied, or there is less
than a 12-inch aisle width between the seat
and the side emergency door.
A. INSIDE BUS
15. Passenger Seats
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
e. Cuts and other upholstery damage
Inspect seat upholstery for condition and
specifications.
Note: Fire-blocking seat material has been
required since 1989.
Note: Punctures where no material is
missing and no foam is exposed shall not
be cause for removing bus from service.
f. Optional Integrated Child Seating
Check the condition and operation of the
seating system.
(Continued on Next Page)
Any portion of seat bottom or back upholstery
is missing, cut, torn, ripped or improperly
repaired, exposing foam.
Any upholstery is non-fire-blocking type for
buses built since 1989.
The integrated system does not function
according to the manufacturer’s operational
procedures or any of the same out-of-service
conditions exist that are applicable to regular
passenger seats.
A. INSIDE BUS
15. Passenger Seats
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
Passenger
Securement
Devices (if
equipped)
All buses equipped with two or three-point
passenger securement systems shall be
equipped with FMVSS No. 210 compliant seat
frames and FMVSS No. 209 compliant belt
assemblies in all passenger-seating positions.
Check type, condition and operation of
passenger securement devices.
Note: Type A buses built since April 1,
1977, must have a functional seat belt at
each passenger position.
h. Webbing Cutter
Check for presence, type, condition and
mounting of the required webbing cutter. It
must be mounted in a location accessible to
the driver from a seated, belted position and
be easily detachable.
Note: Lift-equipped buses or buses using
other
assistive/restraining
devices
containing webbing must have a second
webbing cutter properly mounted in a
location determined by the school district.
Each two-part belt assembly is not separately
color-coded.
Belts are knotted or misrouted, or retractor
covers are damaged or loose.
Belts will not latch, stay latched or unlatch
properly or are the wrong type, missing,
broken, mismatched, improperly installed or
excessively frayed.
Any required webbing cutter is missing,
broken, unusable, improperly mounted or
difficult to remove.
Wrong type of webbing cutter.
A. INSIDE BUS
16. Emergency Doors, Windows, Hatches and Passenger Check System
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
a. Operation – 571.217
Inspect for operation and condition of rear
emergency exit door and side emergency exit
door (if equipped), door hold-open feature (for
buses built after November 1993), emergency
exit windows and emergency exit roof hatches.
Any emergency exit handle, guard or latch
mounting hardware is slightly loose.
Powered roof hatch ventilator (if equipped)
does not work properly.
Roof hatch seal is damaged or dislodged.
(Continued on Next Page)
Any emergency exit does not operate
smoothly and easily to open and close fully,
from the inside and outside when unlatching,
opening, closing and latching (windows from
inside only).
Door (or rear window on rear engine (RE)
buses) hold-open feature does not secure the
exit in the fully open position.
Any emergency exit handle, guard, latch or
mounting hardware is missing, or latching
mechanism does not operate smoothly and
secure the exit in the closed position.
Roof hatch is insecure in the ventilation
position.
Any emergency exit is equipped with any type
of a hasp, lock or any other locking device,
except for an OEM interlock system.
Bus will start with any emergency door (or rear
window on RE buses) locked.
Any emergency exit door does not seal off the
entire opening when latched closed.
A. INSIDE BUS
16. Emergency Doors, Windows, Hatches and Passenger Check System
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
b. Buzzers
Check emergency exit door(s) and window
warning buzzers.
c. Labeling and Pad
1) Inspect for identification labels and
operating
instruction
labels,
for
emergency
doors,
windows,
roof
hatches and hold-open device (if
required).
2) Inspect emergency door header pad. Door pad is ripped or loose.
(Continued on Next Page)
Buzzer warning system for emergency door
(or rear window on RE buses) or any exit
window does not function, gives false alarms
or is not audible in the driver’s compartment.
Buzzer operation is intermittent.
All emergency exits are not clearly labeled
“Emergency Door” or “Emergency Exit” on the
inside and outside of the bus.
The operating instruction labels for any
emergency door (or rear window on RE
buses), or roof hatch are not present on the
inside of the bus (or outside, if required by
applicable specifications).
The operating instruction label for the
emergency door hold-open device is not
visible from both the inside and outside of the
bus (if required).
Door pad is missing or has a protruding edge.
A. INSIDE BUS
16. Emergency Doors, Windows, Hatches and Passenger Check System
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
d. Post-Trip Passenger Check System
(if equipped)
Check for proper operation of post-trip
passenger check system according to
manufacturer’s specifications.
Note:
Post-Trip
Passenger
Check
System
required
on
buses
manufactured on or after July 2023.
If equipped, post-trip passenger check system
does not operate according to specifications,
but requires disarming at rear of bus.
If equipped, post-trip passenger check system
is inoperative.
A. INSIDE BUS
17. Windshield, Side and Rear
Windows
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
a. Glass Cracks – 393.60(c)
Inspect windshield and all windows for cracks
and other damage.
Note: Windshield must be laminated safety
glass. All other windows can be made from
laminated or tempered safety glass.
(Continued on Next Page)
Windshield has any cracks, chips or damage
that obstructs the driver’s view.
Any windshield or other laminated safety glass
window is cracked greater than two inches in
length, or any laminated glass crack or splinter
creates a sharp surface that could cause injury
when touched.
Any tempered safety glass is cracked.
Any window rearward of the windshield is not
laminated, tempered or equivalent safety
glass.
Any glass is missing.
A. INSIDE BUS
17. Windshield, Side and Rear
Windows
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
b. Fogging, Tinting and Visibility – 393.60
Check windshield and windows for fogging,
reduced visibility or improper level of tinting.
Note: Vehicle safety technologies, as
defined in 49 CFR § 393.5 (i.e., camera), and
mounted in accordance with 49 CFR §
393.60, are not cause to place a school bus
out-of-service.
(Continued on Next Page)
Any glass is fogged more than two inches in
from any outer edge.
Any windshield or window fogging or clouding
results in reduced visibility of a mirror.
Any tinting on the windshield or windows to
either side of the driver in the driver’s
compartment (including service door) is not 70
percent light transmitting or clearer.
Any tinted windows behind the driver’s
compartment
are not 28 percent light
transmitting or clearer.
Visibility is reduced for any reason.
A. INSIDE BUS
17. Windshield, Side and Rear
Windows
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
c. Latches and Window Operation
Check latches and windows for condition and
operation.
d. Visor
Check sun visors for condition and operation.
Any window latch is difficult to operate, or any
window does not move up and down freely.
Any window will not move fully up and down or
will not stay closed.
Any window has loose, damaged or protruding
hardware in the passenger compartment.
Sun visor is cracked or damaged, cannot be
adjusted or will not stay in position.
Visibility is reduced for any reason (clouded,
dirty or has foreign objects or decals affixed).
Sun visor is missing.
A. INSIDE BUS
18. Wheelchair Power Lift, Door and Securement System
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
Wheelchair
Power
Lift,
Door
and
Securement System – FMVSS 403, 404,
ADA 49 CFR 38.23)
1) Operate lift through complete cycle and
inspect for proper operation according
to
manufacturer’s
specifications;
inspect
overall
general
condition,
safety features including park brake
interlock, manual backup system, fluid
leakage/seepage, mounting, roll stop
operation,
warning
light,
buzzer
operation and overall mechanical
condition.
Dome light at inside lift area is inoperative.
Lift door or latch does not operate smoothly.
White light at exterior lift area (if originally
equipped) is inoperative.
(Continued on Next Page)
Lift door warning buzzer or light does not
operate.
Lift door latches, weather stripping or
securement system is damaged or loose.
Door switch (to prevent lift operation when the
lift door is closed) or other safety override
features do not function, including park brake
interlock.
Lift does not properly deploy, lower, raise or
retract; jerks; binds; or jacks the vehicle when
fully lowered.
Inboard and outboard roll stops or handrails do
not deploy and retract reliably to the proper
positions.
Lift will not stay in the fully retracted position
(falls against door).
Lift safety belt (if originally equipped) is
damaged or missing.
Lift safety interlock system is not operating
according to manufacturer’s specifications.
A. INSIDE BUS
18. Wheelchair Power Lift, Door and Securement System
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
Hydraulic fluid is seeping.
(Continued on Next Page)
There is side play in excess of two inches in
the lift mechanism when the platform is
extended.
Hydraulic fluid is leaking.
Lift is not securely mounted to the vehicle.
Lift on buses manufactured in 1989 or later is
not equipped with frame padding.
Any part of the lift mechanism or hardware is
damaged, missing or unsecure, including
cams, clips, pins, rollers, platform fasteners
and control head, cables and wiring.
Manual backup system does not function
properly.
A. INSIDE BUS
18. Wheelchair Power Lift, Door and Securement System
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
2) Inspect
wheelchair
and
occupant
securement (tie-down) system for
proper operation, condition, mounting,
type and location.
Note: Beginning in 2008, each 50-inch
section of tie-down track may consist of
two pieces of track, with neither piece less
than 16 inches long and must extend the
full length of the wheelchair position, with
no gaps. For buses manufactured in 2020
and
later,
please
consult
applicable
specification
manual
for
information
concerning passenger securement system
on buses transporting students with
exceptionalities.
571.222
Note: Buses equipped with lifts and other
assistive/restraining devices containing
webbing must have a second webbing
cutter properly mounted in a location
determined by the school district.
3) Check for presence, proper type,
proper mounting and condition of a
second durable webbing cutter.
Track contains dirt/debris, but occupant
securement straps and wheelchair tie-down
straps can still be easily attached to or
detached from the track.
Optional
below-chair
rail
lighting
for
wheelchair securement area (if equipped) is
inoperative.
Track contains excessive dirt or debris.
Wheelchair tie-down track or fasteners are
loose, broken, corroded or improper type (i.e.,
lag bolts, sheet metal screws).
Any 50-inch wheelchair position has more than
two pieces of track, or any piece of track is
shorter
than
inches.
On
buses
manufactured before 2008, any wheelchair
position does not have continuous one-piece,
50-inch tracks.
Wheelchair or occupant securement straps
are broken or frayed, cannot be easily
attached to or detached from track, or will not
operate.
Securement system for buses built between
October 1983 and November 1989 is not a
side-facing, track-and-belt system meeting
Mississippi specifications.
Securement system (for buses built after
November 1989) is not a forward-facing
wheelchair and occupant securement system
meeting Mississippi specifications.
Any required webbing cutter is missing,
broken,
unusable,
improperly
mounted,
difficult to remove or of incorrect type.
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
Two-Way Radio Operation
Inspect radio and antenna for condition,
mounting, location and routing of wiring, and
perform function check.
Radio will not transmit or receive.
Mounting is loose.
Driver has to move out of the normal driving
position to operate radio.
Wiring or connectors are routed or installed
incorrectly, or there is the possibility of an
electrical short circuit due to unsecured or
damaged wiring.
Any
part
of
radio,
external
speaker,
microphone or wiring interferes with driver’s
controls or blocks any of the driver’s view
through any portion of windshield or other
window.
A. INSIDE BUS
19. Two-Way Radio Operation
A. INSIDE BUS
20. Interior Wiring, Cab Hoses and Fire Wall Seals
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
a. Interior Wiring
Inspect visible wiring and connectors for
mounting,
condition,
chafing,
abrasion,
corrosion, loose connections and improper
repairs.
b. Cab Hoses
Inspect all hoses for leaks, condition, routing,
abrasion and presence of heater hose
shielding.
c. Firewall Seals
Inspect firewall for any holes, cracks, unsealed
openings and deteriorated or missing sound
deadening/insulation material.
Any hose inside the bus is seeping lubricant or
coolant.
Sound
deadening/insulation
material
is
missing, unsecured or deteriorated.
Any wire or connector is cut, chafed, missing
insulation, routed against sharp edges or
interferes with driver's controls.
Any wiring is exposed within the passenger
compartment.
Any hose is leaking, cut, chafed, routed
against sharp edges or interferes with driver's
controls.
Any heater hose inside the bus is not shielded
in a manner to prevent spraying of coolant in
the event of a hose failure.
There is any open hole or unsealed area in the
firewall.
A. INSIDE BUS
21. General Condition of Bus Interior
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
a. Floor
Inspect floor covering, plywood sub-floor (if
installed), aisle and cove molding strips, and
ribbed rubber in aisle for condition, adhesion,
loose or missing fasteners, and/or holes and
cracks.
b. Stepwell
Check specifications and condition of step well
and tread.
Floor covering material is loose, deteriorated
or cracked.
Plywood is soft.
Step tread is not sealed at inside edge where
it meets next step.
(Continued on Next Page)
There are any unsealed holes or cracks
through the floor to underside of bus.
Aisle is not equipped with 12-inch wide ribbed
rubber.
Any aisle or front-area-molding strip is not
securely fastened to floor, or any aisle or cove
molding presents a sharp edge or protrusion.
Any damage, wear or condition of the floor
covering material and moldings presents a
tripping hazard.
Step well tread and jointing edge at aisle are
not flush and securely adhered.
Step well tread ribs/nubs on top surface at
leading edge are worn smooth more than four
inches in width.
Step well support structure is not secure or is
broken, or step well is rusted through.
A. INSIDE BUS
21. General Condition of Bus Interior
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
Check stepwell area for added (non-OEM)
items/equipment or any other condition that
could create snagging points. If anything is
suspect, perform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) string-and-nut
test as described in the National School
Transportation Specifications and Procedures.
c. Grab Rail(s)
Check for presence and secure mounting of
entrance grab rail(s).
Check grab rails for any condition that could
create snagging points. If anything is suspect,
perform the NHTSA string-and-nut test as
described
in
the
National
School
Transportation
Specifications
and
Procedures, and found in this publication on
page 65.
(Continued on Next Page)
Any Type C or D bus manufactured since
December 1990 is not equipped with a three-
step riser with full-width steps.
Step
warning
decals
are
missing
or
unreadable (flat floor-equipped buses only).
Any non-OEM items have been added or other
condition exists that could cause snagging.
Grab rails are missing or not securely
mounted.
Lift-equipped buses do not have a left and right
side grab rail at the entrance step well.
Grab rails fail NHTSA string-and-nut test.
A. INSIDE BUS
21. General Condition of Bus Interior
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
d. Paneling and Trim
Check front, sides, rear, ceiling and driver’s
area paneling and trim pieces for secure
fastening, projections, sharp edges, pinch
points and condition.
e. Broom Mounting
Check securement and location of broom.
There are loose or missing fasteners on any
maintenance access panel.
There are graffiti, unauthorized stickers,
missing paint or mildew on interior panels.
(Continued on Next Page)
Sharp edges, pinch points, excessive rust,
loose fasteners or projections from paneling
exist that could cause injury to passengers or
driver.
There are any non-flush-mounted speakers
(except trim rings) or any other unauthorized
items affixed to the interior paneling of the bus
in the passenger area.
There is inappropriate graffiti that requires
immediate attention, subject to district policy.
Broom is not securely mounted in the driver’s
compartment.
A. INSIDE BUS
21. General Condition of Bus Interior
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
f. Loose Objects and Cleanliness
Check to see that all objects within the bus are
secured.
Check cleanliness of bus.
Check for the presence of aerosol containers
and non-aerosol liquid containers.
g. Dog House/Engine Cover
Inspect
dog
house/engine
cover
seals,
soundproofing, weather stripping, prop-rod
and latch operation.
Trash not emptied from trash can or floor not
swept.
Soundproofing is not present or is loose or
deteriorated.
Loose objects such as trashcans, clothing or
cleaning supplies are present that are not in a
secured compartment or container.
There is excessive dirt or trash on the floor,
causing a slippery condition.
Any aerosol cans or other containers with
flammable or volatile contents are present.
Any unlabeled liquid container is present.
Note: An exception to flammable or volatile
contents mentioned above is granted (at
the district’s discretion) to facilitate the use
of alcohol-based hand sanitizer. The
dispenser must be mounted in accordance
with the “New Technology and Equipment”
section.
Seals or weather stripping are leaking and
allowing air/fumes into driver’s compartment.
Prop-rod does not safely support the dog
house/engine cover.
Latches are hard to operate or do not secure
the dog house/engine cover properly.
NUT-AND-STRING TEST
The inspection tool is inexpensive, and the procedure for detecting potentially fatal handrail designs is quite simple. The inspection tool is a
standard one-half inch hex nut, measuring three-quarters of an inch across the flats. This nut is tied to a one-eighth inch thick cotton cord
measuring 36 inches in length with overhand knots. The drawstring should have a minimum length of 30 inches when tied to the nut and attached
so that a pull of at least 10 pounds does not separate the nut from, or break, the drawstring.
Steps to conduct a handrail inspection are:
•
Stand on the ground outside of the bus;
•
Drop the inspection tool between the handrail and step well wall, simulating the typical way students exit the bus;
•
Draw the inspection tool through the handrail in a smooth, continuous slow motion; and
•
Repeat this procedure a minimum of three times.
Note: It is important to drop the inspection tool over the handrail in such a way as to simulate a child exiting the bus. This is a drop-and-drag
test. Do not create a snagging situation by placing the nut in an area that would not be exposed to a drawstring or other articles.
Inspection Results:
Take the bus out of service and repair it if the inspection tool catches or snags anywhere on the handrail. If the nut separates from the drawstring
or the drawstring breaks, reassemble the tool and retest. If the inspection tool pulls freely without catching or snagging, the bus should not be
rejected.
CHART 4
The Handrail Inspection Tool and Procedure
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
B. OUTSIDE
1.
Headlights, Turn Signals, Hazard, Brake, Tail, Backup Lights, Backup Alarm
and Park Lights
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
NOTE: When checking LED lights, if 75
percent or more of the LED elements
illuminate, the light is considered good. If
less than 75 percent of the LED elements
illuminate, the light must be replaced.
571.108, 571.131
a. Headlights
Check
both
headlights
for
brightness,
operation, condition and visible misaiming.
Check high-beam indicator operation and
headlight switch.
If equipped, check Daytime Running Lamps
(DRL) or Full-Time Lights (FTL) for proper
operation.
Left and right headlights are of different types
(conventional, halogen or LED).
DRL or FTL system does not work according
to specifications.
(Continued on Next Page)
Less than 75 percent of the LED elements
illuminate.
Either headlight fails to function on low and
high beam, any lens or sealed beam is fogged
or cracked, or light is dim.
High beam indicator is inoperative.
Dimmer switch sticks, is hard to operate or
fails to function.
Headlight switch is damaged or not securely
mounted, or the knob is missing.
Headlight operation is intermittent.
Upon visible inspection, there is any obvious
misaiming of headlights.
B. OUTSIDE
1.
Headlights, Turn Signals, Hazard, Brake, Tail, Backup Lights, Backup
Alarm and Park Lights
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
b. Turn Signals
Check turn signals for operation, condition
and specifications (see charts 6 and 7).
Any turn signal lens is cracked.
(Continued on Next Page)
Any turn signal fails to function, does not flash
or is dim.
Turn signals do not flash 60 to 120 times per
minute.
Any required side-mounted turn signal(s) are
not present per applicable Mississippi School
Bus Specifications.
Any turn signal is not amber in color.
Any turn signal lens is damaged, darkened,
faded or dirty, affecting visibility or color of the
light, or white light is visible.
Turn signal switch does not function properly,
will not maintain selected position, or does not
cancel and return to neutral position.
Turn signal dash indicators fail to function or
do not properly indicate position of turn signal
switch and operation of signal.
B. OUTSIDE
1.
Headlights, Turn Signals, Hazard, Brake, Tail, Backup Lights, Backup
Alarm and Park Lights
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
c. Hazard Lights
Check four-way hazard lights for operation
and condition.
d. Brake Lights
Check brake lights for operation, condition
and specifications (see chart 7).
Any lens is cracked or dirty.
One brake light fails to function on buses with
four brake light systems.
(Continued on Next Page)
Any four-way hazard light fails to function.
Hazard lights do not flash 60 to 120 times per
minute.
Switch does not function or will not maintain
the “on” position.
More than one brake light fails to function on
buses with four brake light systems.
Either brake light fails to function on buses with
two brake light systems.
Brake lights stay on after brake pedal is
released.
B. OUTSIDE
1.
Headlights, Turn Signals, Hazard, Brake, Tail, Backup Lights, Backup
Alarm and Park Lights
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
e. Tail Lights
Check tail lights for operation, condition and
specifications (see chart 7).
Any brake light lens is cracked.
One tail light fails to function on buses with
four tail light systems.
Any tail light lens is cracked.
(Continued on Next Page)
Any bus not equipped with two 7-inch and two
4-inch brake lights.
Any brake light is not red in color.
Any brake light lens is damaged, darkened,
faded or dirty, affecting visibility or color of the
light, or white light is visible.
More than one tail light fails to function on
buses with four brake light system.
Either tail light fails to function on buses with
two brake light system.
Tail light operation is intermittent.
Any bus is not equipped with two 7-inch and
two 4-inch taillights.
Any tail light is not red in color.
Any tail light lens is damaged, darkened, faded
or dirty, affecting visibility or color of the light,
or white light is visible.
B. OUTSIDE
1.
Headlights, Turn Signals, Hazard, Brake, Tail, Backup Lights, Backup
Alarm and Park Lights
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
f. Backup Lights
Check backup lights for proper operation and
condition (see chart 7).
g. Backup Alarm
Check for presence of backup alarm (for
buses manufactured since November 1990)
and required decal (for buses manufactured
since
November
1993).
Check
proper
operation of alarm (or variable volume alarm,
if equipped) by placing transmission in
reverse (engine running) and listening for
alarm sound.
One of two backup lights does not function.
Any backup lens is cracked.
Decal is not visible in driver compartment in
plain view of the driver.
Decal is not present (for buses manufactured
since November 1993).
Variable volume backup alarm (if equipped) is
not variable.
(Continued on Next Page)
Any bus is not equipped with at least one
functional white backup light.
Backup light(s) stays on all the time or stays
on in any gear position other than reverse.
Backup alarm does not sound.
B. OUTSIDE
1.
Headlights, Turn Signals, Hazard, Brake, Tail, Backup Lights, Backup
Alarm and Park Lights
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
h. Parking Lights
Check parking lights for proper operation and
condition (see charts 6 and 7).
One front or rear parking light fails to function
on buses with four front and four rear parking
light systems.
Any parking light lens is cracked or damaged.
More than one front or rear parking light fails
to function on buses with four front and four
rear parking light systems.
One front or rear parking light fails to function
on buses with a two parking light system.
Any parking light lens is damaged, darkened,
faded or dirty, affecting visibility or color of the
light, or white light is visible.
B. OUTSIDE
2.
Clearance, Side Marker, ID Lights, Reflectors and Strobe Light
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
a. Clearance, Side Marker and ID lights
Check lights for operation, condition and
location. Also check license plate light (see
charts 6 and 7).
Note: When there are two lights factory-
mounted at the top corners, the front is a
clearance and the side is a side marker.
When there is one light factory-mounted at
the top corners, it is a clearance/side
marker
combination,
meeting
both
requirements.
Any intermediate (center) side marker light
fails to function.
Any clearance or ID light lens is cracked.
One or two ID lights (but not all ID lights) on
the front or rear of the bus fail to function.
License plate light is inoperative.
(Continued on Next Page)
Any
front
or
rear
top
corner-mounted
clearance, side marker or clearance/side
marker combination light fails to function.
Any bus over 30 feet in length is not equipped
with intermediate amber side marker lights on
both sides.
Any intermediate or front clearance, side
marker, clearance/side marker combination
light or ID light lens is not amber.
Any
rear
clearance,
side
marker,
clearance/side marker combination light or ID
lens is not red.
Any clearance, side marker, clearance/side
marker combination light or ID light lens is
damaged, darkened, faded or dirty, affecting
visibility or color of the light, or white light is
visible.
All ID lights on either the front or the rear of the
bus are inoperative.
B. OUTSIDE
2.
Clearance, Side Marker, ID Lights, Reflectors and Strobe Light
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
b. Reflectors
Check reflectors for condition and location
(see charts 6 and 7).
Note: Reflectors are required as follows:
1) Buses over 30 feet in length: two red on
rear, one red on each side at rear, one
intermediate amber on each side, one
amber at front and one amber front of
cowl on each side.
2) Buses under 30 feet in length: same,
except intermediate amber reflectors are
not required.
c. Strobe Light
Check roof-mounted white flashing strobe
light for operation, location and condition.
Any reflector is damaged or cracked.
(Continued on Next Page)
Any required reflectors are missing.
Any required reflector is faded, significantly
affecting its original color.
Any bus manufactured since December 1990
is not equipped with a roof-mounted white
flashing strobe light mounted in the center of
the roof approximately 48 inches from the rear
of the bus.
The strobe light on any bus built prior to
December 1990 is not mounted in the center
of the rear part of the roof.
Strobe light does not function.
B. OUTSIDE
3.
Pupil Warning Lights
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
Pupil Warning Lights
Check pupil warning lights for operation and
condition
according
to
manufacturer’s
specifications (see charts 6 and 7).
Note: See chart 5, for function checks.
Pupil warning light hoods in the front and
rear of the bus have not been required
since September 1993. Strobing LED bulbs
have been required on buses since 2023.
Either of the two pupil warning pilot lights fail
to function.
Any pupil warning light lens is damaged but
no white light is visible.
Any pupil warning light fails to function or is
dim.
Front and rear amber and red lights do not
alternately flash (side to side).
Any outer pupil warning light is not red, inner
pupil warning light is not amber, or pupil
warning light is not OEM or equivalent.
Any pupil warning light lens is damaged and
white light is visible.
Any pupil warning light lens is obstructed,
misaimed, dirty, darkened or faded, affecting
the color of the light or reducing the visibility
to less than 500 feet in bright sunlight.
Pupil warning lights fail to function according
to all conditions in chart 5.
EIGHT-LIGHT WARNING SYSTEM
NOTE:
System may not be designed in such a way that the operator is required to actuate controls in a
particular sequence to achieve the desired combination of conditions.
EXAMPLE: If the driver places the three-position switch in the amber position with the master switch on, he should not have
to move the three-position switch to red or open the service door to deactivate the amber warning lights. The
driver must be able to deactivate the amber warning lights by going directly from the amber to the off position.
WITH MASTER SWITCH, CONTROL SWITCH and SERVICE DOOR
IN THE FOLLOWING POSITIONS:
CONDITION OF STOP ARM(S), STOP ARM LIGHTS, AMBER
WARNING LIGHTS AND RED WARNING LIGHTS MUST BE:
MASTER
SWITCH
POSITION
(ON or OFF)
CONTROL
SWITCH
POSITION
(three-positions: OFF,
AMBER or RED)
SERVICE
DOOR
POSITION
STOP ARMS,
STOP ARM
LIGHTS
AMBER
WARNING
and
PILOT LIGHTS
RED WARNING
and
PILOT LIGHTS
*AUDIBLE
ALARM
1)
ON
OFF
CLOSED
RETRACTED,
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
2)
ON
OFF
OPEN
RETRACTED,
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
3)
ON
AMBER
CLOSED
RETRACTED,
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
4)
ON
AMBER
OPEN
RETRACTED,
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
5)
ON
RED
CLOSED
EXTENDED,
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
6)
ON
RED
OPEN
EXTENDED,
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
7)
OFF
ANY POSITION
ANY POSITION
RETRACTED,
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
* Note: Effective September 1, 1992.
CHART 5
B. OUTSIDE
4.
Stop Arm(s) and Student Crossing Arm
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
a. Stop Arm(s)
Check
stop
arm(s)
for
specifications,
operation and condition. (See chart 6).
Any wiring is not properly routed and secured.
Hinges or bushings are not adequately
lubricated.
Stop arm extends more than or less than 90
degrees (plus or minus five degrees).
(Continued on Next Page)
Any wires or ground strap(s) are broken.
Any stop arm light fails to function or lights do
not flash 60 to 120 times per minute in an
alternating pattern.
Stop arm does not extend or retract, or is slow
to extend or retract.
Any stop arm has an air or vacuum leak or is
loosely mounted, or components are badly
worn.
Any stop arm paint or decal is significantly
faded or discolored.
Stop arm does not operate according to all the
conditions in chart 5.
Stop arm(s) not of proper type and
specifications:
1) Octagonal (since September 1, 1985)
2) Alternately flashing red lights
B. OUTSIDE
4.
Stop Arm(s) and Student Crossing Arm
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
Check that rear stop-arm decal is not present
on forward side of arm on buses built after
September 1, 1993.
b. Student Crossing Arm
Check
front
bumper-mounted
student
crossing arm for specifications, operation, and
condition.
Note:
For crossing arm and stop arm
requirements, see Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard (FMVSS) 131.
Crossing arm extends more or less than 90
degrees (plus or minus five degrees).
Hinges or bushings are not adequately
lubricated.
3) High
intensity
reflectivity
(since
December 1990)
4) Optional Dual stop arms on Type C
and Type D
A stop arm decal has been installed on the
forward side of the rear stop arm for buses
built after September 1, 1993.
Not equipped with student crossing arm, for
buses manufactured since December 1992.
Crossing arm does not extend or retract, or is
slow to extend or retract.
Any crossing arm has an air or vacuum leak,
is loosely mounted or has badly worn
components.
B. OUTSIDE
5.
General Condition of Bus Exterior
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
a. Mirrors – 571.111
Check all exterior mirrors, mounts and
brackets for tightness and condition. See
specifications for required fasteners and
hardware.
Note: Exterior mirror fasteners, mounts
and bracketry must be non-corrosive
material on buses manufactured since
2020.
b. Bumpers – 393.203(e), 393.86
Check bumpers for mounting, condition and
color, and check body seal on rear bumper.
Bumper is not black (MFSAB exempt)
Bumper is equipped with any unauthorized
stickers or decals.
(Continued on Next Page)
Mirror mounts or bracket(s) are bent, broken,
not secured, or have loose or missing
fasteners.
Any exterior mirror is broken, cracked or loose
in the frame, or reflective surface is faded or
deteriorated.
Bumper is significantly bent or has protruding
metal.
Bumper, mounts or braces are bent, broken,
not secured, or have loose or missing
fasteners.
Diagonal reflective striping (if equipped) is
missing,
significantly
damaged
or
not
reflective.
Front bumper on buses built since October
1982 is not of sufficient strength to allow the
front of the bus to be lifted without permanent
deformation.
Rear bumper to body seal is damaged or
missing.
B. OUTSIDE
5.
General Condition of Bus Exterior
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
c. Body Damage
Check body exterior for damage, scratches,
dents, etc.
d. Paint
Check paint on school bus body, trim and
wheels for required coloration and condition.
Note: See Multi-Function School Activity
Bus (MFSAB) paint scheme requirements.
e. Reflective Markings
Check reflective markings for coloration,
reflectivity and condition. Reflective markings
on
buses
have
been
required
since
September 1995.
Check for presence of reflective markings
around any emergency exit door, window or
roof hatch as required by FMVSS No. 217 (for
buses purchased after November 1993).
Body has small dents, scratches, etc.
Body has small rust spots or water leaks.
Paint is faded, discolored or damaged.
Reflective markings other than those around
any emergency exit as required by FMVSS
No. 217 are faded, discolored, damaged or
peeling.
(Continued on Next Page)
Any body part is damaged or dislocated,
creating a protrusion or sharp edge.
Body panels, rivets or other components are
damaged or corroded so that joint strength or
body structural integrity is compromised.
Paint is not National School Bus Yellow
(except white roof). Trim, rub rails, warning
light hoods or background are not black. Stud-
piloted disk wheels and spoke hub-mounted
wheels are not black, or hub-piloted wheels
are not National School Bus Yellow.
Any required reflective markings are missing,
significantly faded or discolored around any
emergency exit door, window or roof hatch.
B. OUTSIDE
5.
General Condition of Bus Exterior
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
f. Lettering
Check all lettering for required type, size,
location and color (see charts 6 and 7).
Bus is not equipped with following lettering:
1) Eight-inch “SCHOOL BUS” on front
and rear.
2) “Name District Schools” on left and
right sides of body in five-inch
letters.*
3) Local bus number on rear, both sides
and front in five-inch minimum
lettering.
Any required lettering is not clearly readable.
Any required lettering is not black (except
handicapped symbol, local bus number if
located on bumper, and/or emergency door
hold-open device labeling).
Exterior
emergency
hatch
operating
instructions are not clearly readable.
(Continued on Next Page)
Bus is not equipped with the following:
1) Handicapped symbol on front and rear
of wheelchair lift-equipped buses.
2) Minimum
two-inch
lettering
“Emergency Door” at top or above
emergency exit door.
3) Emergency exit windows and roof
hatches labeled “Emergency Exit.”
4) Fuel type lettering is not present on
buses.
There is not at least one local bus number and
district name present on the exterior.
Any required handicapped symbol is not
reflective, white on blue background, and a
minimum of six inches by six inches.
B. OUTSIDE
5.
General Condition of Bus Exterior
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
g. Emergency Door Operation – 571.217
Check emergency door for operation and
condition from exterior of bus.
h. Engine Hood – 393.201
Check engine hood for operation, condition
and safety latch.
i. Cleanliness
Check exterior of bus for cleanliness.
Emergency doors equipped with a link or strap
that prevents the door from opening to far and
causing damage. This should be working, not
damaged, tight, and should not interfere with
operation of the door.
Hold open device is non-operational, bent,
damaged or loose.
Side emergency door seal damaged or does
not effectively prevent water, and/or dirt from
entering bus
Hood is misaligned or out of adjustment.
Hood hinges are stiff or damaged, but remain
operational.
Exterior of bus is dirty.
Emergency door is hard to open fully from
outside of bus.
Emergency door latch mechanism requires
more than 40 pounds to release.
Emergency door handle is mounted to allow
“hitching” onto the bus.
Rear emergency door seal damaged or does
not effectively prevent exhaust, water, and/or
dirt from entering bus.
Hood cannot be opened as designed.
Safety latch is damaged or stiff, or does not
secure the hood.
Hood prop rod(s) or hold-open feature does
not function properly.
Bus is dirty to the point that visibility through
any window or mirror, or brightness of any
light, is significantly reduced.
CHART 193
MINIMUM LETTERING AND LIGHTING
A.
Clearance and Side Marker Lights (one intermediate
on buses 30 feet or longer).
BB. Stop Arm(s)
C.
Front Turn Signals and Parking Lamps
F.
Pupil Warning Lights--Dual (side by side, amber and red)
G.
Reflectors, one at rear body side panel, one
near front of body and one intermediate
(only on buses 30 feet or longer) on both sides
I.
Emergency Exit Lettering
J.
Double-Faced Flashing Red Lights
K.
“School Bus” Lettering (front and rear)
(see specifications)
L.
(Name of District) District Schools (both sides)*
M.
Local Bus Number (both sides and front and back)
N.
Universal Handicapped Symbol (lift buses)
O.
Identification Lamps
S.
Battery Box
U.
Pupil Crossing Arm
Y.
Rear-View Mirror System (see specifications)
Z.
Cross/Side View Mirror System (see specifications)
CHART 194
MINIMUM LETTERING AND LIGHTING
A.
Clearance and Side Marker Lights
B.
Seven-Inch Brake/Tail/Parking Lights
C.
Seven-Inch Turn Signals (amber)
E.
Four-Inch Brake/Tail/Parking Lights
F.
Pupil Warning Lights--Dual (side-by-side
amber and red)
G.
Reflectors
H.
License Plate Lamp (one minimum)
I.
Emergency Door and Exit Lettering
K.
“School Bus” Lettering (front and rear)
(see specifications)
L.
(Name of District) District Schools (both
sides) *
M.
Local Bus Number (both sides and front
and back)
N.
Universal Handicapped Symbol (lift-
equipped buses)
O.
Identification Lamps
P.
Backup Lights
R.
Fuel Door and Fuel Type Lettering
T.
Wheelchair Lift Landing Light
Y.
Rear View Mirror System
Z.
Cross/Side View Mirror System
AA. Roof-Mounted White Strobe Light
CC. Rear Door Lettering (see specifications)
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
C. ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1.
Steering
a. Steering Wheel, Play and Assist –
393.209(d), 570.60(c), 393.209(c),
393.209(a), 393.209(b) ©
Check condition of the steering wheel.
Check for play in the steering system at the
steering wheel using the following procedures:
1) Visual check: From inside bus with
engine running, rotate steering wheel
lightly from side to side until motion
can be observed at tires. Measure the
free play (lash) at steering wheel outer
diameter. This procedure must be
performed with the vehicle on the
ground.
2) To check power assist operation, run
engine at fast idle, turn steering wheel
a full right and left turn, and feel for
binding, jamming or belt slippage.
Steering wheel OEM covering has minor
wear, cracks or looseness not exposing metal
reinforcement.
(Continued on Next Page)
Any portion of the OEM covering is loose,
deteriorated, cracked or missing, exposing
metal
steering
wheel
reinforcement
or
interfering with usage.
Steering wheel is loose on column.
Steering wheel or covering is non-OEM
design.
Free play (lash) exceeds amounts specified in
chart 8.
Power assist is inadequate, or there is
binding, jamming or belt slippage.
CHART 8
STEERING WHEEL PLAY (LASH) MEASUREMENTS
Figure 1
Steering Wheel Size
15 inches – 1-3/4” (4.4 cm)
16 inches - 2” (5.1 cm)
18 inches – 2-1/4” (5.7 cm)
20 inches – 2-1/2” (6.4 cm)
22 inches – 2-3/4” (7.0 cm)
Figure 2
Wheel (rim) Size:
16 inches or less - 1/4” (6.5 mm)
17 to 18 inches - 3/8” (9.5 mm)
Over 18 inches - 1/2” (13 mm)
C. ENGINE
1.
Steering
b. Column - ©393.209(c), 393.209(d),
393.209(a), 393.209(b)
Check steering column inside bus for up-and-
down play (parallel to shaft), side-to-side play
(perpendicular to shaft) and proper mounting.
c. Steering Gear Box and other external
components – 393.209(d), 369.3(a)(1),
Check condition of the steering system using
the following procedures with the vehicle on
the ground (not suspended):
Any column shaft yoke, coupler or joint dust
boot is torn.
(Continued on Next Page)
Column side-to-side play exceeds 1/4 inch or
up-and-down play exceeds one inch.
Column assembly mounting (including floor
mounting plate) or fasteners are loose.
Tilt/telescopic assembly (if equipped) will not
stay locked in position.
Steering column shaft U-joint inside the bus (if
equipped) is loose, damaged or noisy after
lubrication.
Firewall or floor rubber boot is torn, ripped or
missing.
Steering column shaft U-joints, couplers, slide
yokes, pinch bolts, etc., are loose, worn,
damaged, have excessive play, or have loose
or missing fasteners.
Any column shaft yoke, coupler or joint dust
boot is missing.
Steering gear box is loose on frame or any
fasteners are loose or missing.
C. ENGINE
1.
Steering
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
1) With engine running, have assistant
move steering wheel back and forth
repeatedly
to
load
steering
components.
2) Observe
the
following
external
steering and related suspension and
frame components for looseness while
assistant works the steering (also see
specific
procedures
under
each
component):
a) Column
shaft, dust boot
and
hardware
b) Column U-joints, couplers, slide
yokes (as equipped)
c) Coupling at gear box
d) Gear box
e) Pitman arm
f) Drag link
g) Steering knuckle or arms
h) Tie rod ends
i) Idler arm (as equipped)
j) Vehicle frame cross-members and
frame braces, including associated
rivets and fasteners for looseness
and condition
(Continued on Next Page)
There is any binding in steering gear box.
Frame braces or cross-members are cracked,
loose or missing fasteners.
Any axle or suspension/steering component is
loose
or
worn
beyond
specifications
prescribed elsewhere in this manual.
C. ENGINE
1.
Steering
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
3) Have an assistant carefully rotate the
steering wheel all the way to the left,
then all the way to the right, to check
the steering stops and power steering
pressure relief valve.
d. Pitman Arm – 393.209(d), 396.3(a)(1),
393.209(d)
Check the Pitman arm for looseness or
misalignment at sector shaft splines and
looseness at all joints. Check looseness of
pinch bolt and fasteners and condition of
Pitman arm.
Pitman arm grease fitting (if equipped) is
loose or missing.
Tire contacts any part of the bus frame,
suspension, steering or other components.
Any play is observed between Pitman arm
and sector shaft.
Pinch bolt at sector shaft is loose or missing.
Pitman arm to steering sector shaft marks are
misaligned.
Pitman arm ball joint (if equipped) has more
than 1/16 inch axial play (i.e., in-and-out play
between the ball stud and socket; see figure
6, page 93).
Pitman arm ball joint nut or cotter pin is loose
or missing.
Pitman arm is cracked or damaged.
Any obvious welded repair
TIGHTENING STEERING COLUMN JOINT
BOLTS
WARNING: FAILURE TO MAINTAIN THE
STEERING SYSTEM IN PROPER CONDITION
CAN CAUSE REDUCED STEERING FUNCTION,
RESULTING
IN
PERSONAL
INJURY
AND
PROPERTY DAMAGE.
It is recommended that steering column joint bolts
be checked for tightness every 50,000 miles or
annually,
whichever
occurs
first.
DO
NOT
OVERTIGHTEN THEM.
C. ENGINE
1.
Steering
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
e. Drag Link – 396.3(a)(1)
Check the drag link ends, shaft and fasteners
for looseness and condition.
f. Steering Arm
Check upper steering arm (Ackerman arm)
and left and right side lower steering arms for
securement and condition.
Check condition and securement of steering
stops and lock nuts.
Any grease fitting is loose, missing or will not
take grease.
Drag link needs lubrication.
Drag link dust boots are cut, damaged or
missing.
(Continued on Next Page)
Drag link ball stud is loose in Pitman arm or
upper steering arm.
Any nut or cotter pin is loose or missing.
Drag link shaft is damaged or bent.
Drag link ends axial or horizontal play
exceeds 1/16 inch (See figure 6).
Horizontal socket type (adjustable) drag link
end has more than 1/16 inch axial or lateral
play.
Any steering arm is bent, cracked or
damaged.
Any steering arm attachment point is loose, or
any fasteners or cotter pins are missing.
Either steering stop or lock is loose, damaged
or missing.
C. ENGINE
1.
Steering
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
g. Tie Rod and Ends
Check tie rod, tie rod ends, dust boots, clamps
and fasteners for looseness, damage and
condition.
h. Idler Arm
Check idler arm assembly (as equipped) for
looseness, damage and condition.
Tie rod end dust boots are cut, damaged or
missing.
Tie rod end needs lubrication.
Any tie rod end grease fitting is loose, missing
or will not take grease.
Idler arm needs lubrication.
Idler arm grease fitting is loose, missing or will
not take grease.
Tie rod to end clamps or fasteners are
stripped,
missing,
loose
or
improperly
positioned for proper clearance.
Any tie rod or end is bent, cracked or
damaged.
Tie rod ends axial or horizontal play exceeds
1/16 inch. (See figure 6).
Tie rod end ball stud is loose in steering arm
or idler arm, has missing or loose fasteners,
or has missing cotter pins.
Idler arm is cracked or damaged, or cotter pin
is missing.
Idler arm up-and-down play is greater than 1/4
inch total (1/8 inch either direction). (See
figure 7.)
Figure 6 - Checking the Rod and Drag
Figure 7 - Checking Idler Movement, Typical
Link End Movement
A.
Movement in the axial direction
must be less than 1/16 inch.
B. Tie rod/drag link free to rotate
within steering arm socket.
1.
Tie rod/drag link end
2.
Steering arm
C. ENGINE COMPARTMENT
2.
Batteries
-
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
a. Battery Box, Door and Tray
Check battery box, door and tray for
operation, condition and securement.
b. Hold-down – 393.30
Check for tightness, condition and type of
battery hold-down.
c. Battery Terminals
Check
cable
terminals
for
cleanliness,
tightness and condition.
d. Battery Cables – 393.28, 396.3(a)(1)©,
393.77(b), 393.30©
Check
cable
assemblies
for
routing,
securement, condition and size.
Battery slide tray is corroded, dirty or hard to
slide in and out.
Battery cable length or battery mounting
restricts access to battery/batteries for
servicing.
(Continued on Next Page)
Battery slide tray or box is loose, corroded or
damaged,
reducing
securement
of the
batteries, or door does not open or will not
stay latched.
Battery slide tray does not slide in and out or
tray lock, or stop is missing or nonfunctional.
Hold-down assembly is not OEM design,
missing,
loose,
corroded
or
damaged,
reducing securement of the batteries.
Any cable terminal is loose, damaged,
corroded or has missing terminal insulator (if
equipped).
Cable or insulation is cracked, damaged or
corroded.
Cable is misrouted, unsecured or missing
protective grommets, loom or other means of
protection from chafing against any metal,
sharp edge or hot surface.
Cable is smaller than original equipment size.
C. ENGINE COMPARTMENT
2.
Batteries
-
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
e. Cleanliness
Check cleanliness of battery or batteries.
f.
Load Test
Perform battery load test on battery/batteries
to check condition. Check battery/batteries for
proper type and load rating.
Battery top or sides are corroded, greasy, dirty
or wet with electrolyte.
Battery cable length or battery mounting
restricts access to battery/batteries for testing.
Cable appears to be too small in diameter or
of excessive length (see chart 9).
Flat braided engine ground cable is frayed or
corroded, or ends are not secure.
Batteries and compartment are excessively
dirty or corroded.
Battery/batteries
are
of
insufficient
cold cranking amp
(CCA) rating.
Any high-voltage system with a dripping leak
at any point.
Damaged or exposed high-voltage cabling.
Broke or damaged charging port on the
vehicle.
CHARGING SYSTEMS CABLE SIZE CHART
SYSTEM
VOLTAGE
RATED
RECOMMENDED MINIMUM CHARGING CABLE GAUGE SIZE
OUTPUT
IN
AMPERES
4 FT. or
Less
4 -7 FT.
7 -10 FT.
10 -13 FT.
13 -16 FT.
16 -19 FT.
19 -22 FT.
22 -28 FT.
12 VOLT
0 - 20
20 - 35
35 - 50
50 - 65
65 - 85
85 - 105
105 - 125
125 - 150
Maximum difference between battery voltage and alternator voltage is 0.5 volt for 12-volt systems at full-rated output.
Maximum voltage drop in the sensing (#2-terminal) lead must not exceed 0.2 volt for 12-volt three-wire systems.
Cable gauge size calculation above takes into account terminal-connection resistance.
Note: When an insulated (no frame ground) charging system is installed, the length of the return circuit must be included to obtain
total circuit length and determine the proper wire size.
CHART 9
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
C.
ENGINE
3.
Fluid Levels and Condition
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
a. Brake Fluid – 393.45(a), 571.106
Check brake fluid and brake power-assist
hydraulic fluid (if equipped) for level and
condition.
b. Power Steering Fluid – 396.3, 396.5,
393.209
Check power steering fluid level and
condition.
c. Oil
Check engine oil level and condition.
(Continued on Next Page)
Level of brake fluid in either side of master
cylinder reservoir is lower than one-quarter of
an inch from top or below “add” mark.
Brake fluid or power-assist fluid shows
evidence of excessive water, oil or dirt
contamination.
Brake power-assist hydraulic fluid is below
cold “add” mark.
Power steering fluid shows evidence of
excessive water, oil or dirt contamination.
Power steering fluid is below cold “add” mark.
No oil is observed on dipstick.
Dipstick is missing.
Engine oil level is below the “add” mark or
above “full” mark.
There
is
evidence
of
fuel
or
water
contamination in the oil.
C.
ENGINE
3.
Fluid Levels and Condition
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
d. Transmission Fluid
Check transmission fluid level and condition.
e. Windshield Washer Reservoir and Fluid
Check windshield washer fluid reservoir and
cap for condition, mounting and fluid level.
Transmission fluid shows need of servicing
(discoloration or smell).
Reservoir is loose, washer fluid level is low
and/or cap is damaged.
(Continued on Next Page)
Dipstick is missing, broken or the incorrect
type.
Transmission fluid is below the “add” mark or
above the “full” mark.
Transmission
fluid
shows
evidence
of
excessive dirt, metal or coolant contamination.
Reservoir is missing, leaking or empty, and/or
cap is missing.
C.
ENGINE
3.
Fluid Levels and Condition
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
f. Coolant
Check engine coolant level, condition and
freeze protection.
Note: Follow manufacturer’s
recommendations for checking coolant
condition, PH and additive package.
Note: Use caution when opening a hot
cooling system.
Coolant level is below the “full” mark.
Coolant shows evidence of excessive oil, dirt
contamination, or rust and corrosion.
Coolant freeze protection is minus 20 degrees
Fahrenheit or lower (see chart 10).
Coolant pH level is too high or too low, or
coolant additive package has depleted to an
unacceptable level.
Coolant level is below the “add” mark or
cannot be seen in the reservoir or radiator
with cap removed.
CHART 10
Note: Technicians should test engine coolant properties during every
inspection using a coolant test-strip kit. Consult the OEM for
recommended test kits and procedures.
Freezing-Points of Antifreeze Solutions
SOLUTION
PROTECTION
Percentage
of
Antifreeze
Percentage
of
Water
Celsius
Fahrenheit
0%
0%
10%
90%
-3
12%
88%
-4
14%
86%
-5
16%
84%
-6
18%
82%
-7
20%
80%
-8
24%
76%
-10
28%
72%
-13
30%
70%
-15
32%
68%
-16
36%
64%
-20
-4
40%
60%
-24
-11
44%
56%
-28
-18
48%
52%
-33
-27
50%
50%
-37
-35
52%
48%
-39
-38
56%
44%
-45
-49
60%
40%
-51
-60
Boiling Points of Antifreeze Solutions at Various
Pressures
Pressure in Pounds per Square Inch (PSI)
0 PSI
8 PSI
12 PSI
16 PSI
20 PSI
Percentage
of Antifreeze
Solution
0%
33%
44%
50%
60%
Boiling Points in Degrees Fahrenheit (°F)
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
a. Belt(s)
1) Tightness
Visually and physically check all drive
belts for proper tension. If available,
use a tension gauge (see figure 9). If
a gauge is not available, use a ruler to
measure the deflection of the belt(s)
up and down at the widest point
between the drive and driven pulley(s)
(see figure 10).
2) Condition
Inspect belt(s) for presence, glazing,
oil contamination, dry rotting, cuts and
separation of plies. Check belts for
twisting or distortion.
3) Routing and Alignment
Inspect belt(s) for correct routing,
alignment and contact with objects
other than pulleys.
Any
belt
exceeds
tension
reading
recommended by manufacturer.
Using ruler method, any belt has less than half
an inch deflection (too tight) when firm
pressure is applied (see figure 10).
Any belt is glazed.
Any belt is slightly misaligned.
(Continued Next Page)
Any belt tensioner (automatic or manual) does
not apply proper tension to belt.
Tension on any belt is too loose (based on
specifications of type tension gauge used).
Tension of any belt (using ruler method) is too
loose when firm pressure is applied (greater
than three-quarter inch deflection).
Any belt is missing, oil-saturated, dry-rotted or
cut, or plies of belt(s) are separated.
Any belt is twisted or distorted.
Belt misalignment is excessive and could
result in failure.
Any belt is making contact with objects other
than pulley(s).
Any belt is routed incorrectly.
C. ENGINE COMPARTMENT
4.
Belts and All Hoses
CHECKING BELT TENSION AFTER TIGHTENING
Figure 9 - Checking Belt Tension
Figure 10 - Measuring Belt Tension
(Gauge Method)
(Ruler Method)
C.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
4.
Belts and All Hoses
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
b. Hose(s)
1) Clamps and Connections
Visually and physically check that
hose connections or clamp(s) are
tight.
Note: References to hoses include
all types of hoses located in the
engine compartment and related
components,
including
power
steering, coolant, air compressor
intake, vacuum, brake hydraulic
assist, engine oil and transmission
hoses.
2) Condition
Inspect all hoses for cuts, abrasions
and wear, oil saturation, dry rotting
and ballooning.
3) Routing
Inspect routing and securement of all
hoses.
Any hose connection or clamp is loose or
overtightened.
Any hose connection (other than brake) is
seeping.
Any hose is misrouted or unsecured so that
heat, abrasion or other damage is possible.
Any hose connection or clamp is stripped,
damaged or overtightened, causing hose
damage beyond the outer cover.
Any brake hose is seeping or leaking.
Any hose is cut, abraded, worn, oil-saturated,
dry-rotted or ballooned to the point that failure
is likely.
Any hose is misrouted or unsecured so that
heat, abrasion or other damage is likely.
C.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
5.
Accessory Mounting and Condition
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
a. Air Cleaner
Check air intake system, housing, lid, piping,
gaskets,
seals
and clamps
for
leaks,
securement and condition. If equipped, record
air filter restriction gauge measurement.
Note: If air leaks are suspect, inspect for
dirt/dust tracking through air cleaner
assembly and intake piping.
b. Power Steering Pump
Check securement and condition of power
steering pump.
c. Air Compressor and Filter
Check securement and condition of air
compressor and filter assembly.
Any portion of air intake system has minor
dents or damage that is not causing air leaks.
Air filter restriction gauge is not working
properly.
Air compressor external air filter (if equipped)
is dirty.
(Continued on Next Page)
There are intake system leaks; loose, missing
or damaged components; or other conditions
that could allow dust or dirt damage to internal
engine parts.
Air filter restriction exceeds manufacturer’s
specifications.
Any portion of the power steering pump,
mounting brackets or fasteners is cracked,
damaged, loose or missing.
Any portion of the air compressor, mounting
brackets, fasteners or compressor air-filter
system is cracked, damaged, loose or
missing.
C.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
5.
Accessory Mounting and Condition
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
d. Water Pump
Check condition of water pump and pulley.
e. Fan
Check fan blades, hub and fan clutch
assembly for securement and condition.
f. Alternator
Check securement and condition of alternator
assembly.
There is evidence of coolant seepage from
water pump, seal, gasket surface or weep
hole.
Alternator is noisy.
Water pump is noisy, bearing is damaged or
coolant is leaking.
Water pump fasteners are loose, damaged or
missing to the point that failure or leaks could
occur.
Fan has any cracked, bent or broken blades.
Any portion of fan mounting is loose.
Fan clutch is worn or seized.
Any of the alternator, mounting brackets or
fasteners are cracked, loose or missing.
Alternator is not charging.
C.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
6.
Wiring
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
Routing and Condition
Check routing, securement and condition of
all wiring and any electrical cable in the engine
compartment and related areas.
There is any slightly loose, damaged or
corroded wiring connector or terminal end.
Any repair has been made using improper
gauge wiring.
Any wiring is misrouted, unsecured or missing
protective grommets, loom or other means of
protection from chafing against any metal,
sharp edge or hot surfaces.
There are any burnt wires, or any wires are
missing insulation (other than ground straps).
C.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
7.
Fuel System and Lines
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
Fuel System and Lines – 396.3(a)(1), 393.65,
393.67
Visually check the condition, operation and
securement of all fuel system components,
including fuel lines and routing in the engine
compartment.
There is evidence of dirt, algae or water in a
fuel water separator.
There is any unsecured, poorly routed or
loose fuel line or hose that could cause fire
due to abrasion or heat damage.
Any fuel system connection is stripped, loose,
cracked or leaking.
Any fuel system component is damaged or
not mounted securely.
C.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
8. Radiator
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
a. Radiator and Reservoir
Check radiator and reservoir assemblies for
mounting, securement and condition.
b. Cap
Check condition of radiator cap and perform
pressure test.
WARNING:
ALWAYS
USE
PROPER
PROCEDURES
WHEN
REMOVING
A
RADIATOR CAP.
c. Fan Shroud
Check fan shroud for mounting and condition.
Any portion of the radiator, reservoir or
mounting system is cracked or damaged, or
has loose or missing fasteners not causing
leaks or failure.
Radiator cap is hard to open or close.
Radiator cap leaks down slowly at rated
pressure.
Any portion of the radiator, reservoir or
mounting system is cracked, damaged or has
loose or missing fasteners, causing leaks or
failure.
Radiator cap is missing.
Radiator cap is the incorrect type or pressure
rating, or fails pressure test.
Fan shroud is missing, loose or has excessive
damage that may interfere with the cooling fan.
(This Page Intentionally Left Blank)
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
1.
Front Suspension
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
393.207(f), 393.207(a)©, 570.61(a), 393.207(c),
393.207(d)©, 393.207
a. Front Wheel Bearings
Inspect front wheel bearings and related
components
for
condition
and
proper
adjustment of bearings. With front wheels
raised, grasp tire and attempt to rock wheel
and move in and out to check for play. Spin
tire to check for noise and condition of
bearings.
Note: To correctly identify the source of
any play or to determine if the play is in
wheel bearings, have an assistant press
and hold the foot brake pedal (ensuring the
front
brakes
are
engaged)
while
rechecking play. If movement disappears
with brakes applied, then the play was in
the wheel bearings.
b. I-Beam
Inspect I-beam axle assembly.
Oil or grease is seeping from hub bearing
caps.
(Continued on Next Page)
Oil or grease is leaking from hub bearing caps.
Wheel
bearing
endplay
exceeds
manufacturer’s specifications of 0.010-inch
maximum, measured at the hub.
Any noise, binding or roughness is discovered
in bearings.
I-beam has been heated, cut or modified, or is
cracked or damaged.
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
1.
Front Suspension
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
c. Kingpins
Inspect kingpin assemblies for condition and
play as follows:
Note: Wheel bearings must be adjusted
properly (or wheel bearing play
must be eliminated by locking
brakes) before checking kingpins.
Do not tighten kingpin lock (if
equipped)
or
grease
kingpins
before inspecting.
1) With front wheels raised, use a pry bar
for leverage, and attempt to move the
wheel in and out at the top and bottom
(see figure 11).
2) Place a pry bar under wheel and lift tire
straight up and down to determine
condition of thrust bearing.
End cap O-rings or bolts are loose or missing.
(Continued on Next Page)
Locking pin is backing out or missing.
Kingpin movement is more than 1/4 inch
measured at outside edge of tire (see figure
11).
Vertical (up and down) play in kingpin
assembly is greater than 0.060 inch (see
figure 12), and/or thrust bearing is damaged
or missing.
Note: If play is beyond specifications, wear
may be in the kingpin, axle eye, thrust
bearing and/or kingpin bushings.
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
1.
Front Suspension
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
d. Shackles
Inspect condition of shackles, spring hangers
and pinch bolts.
e. Spring Mounts
Inspect spring mount bracket(s) for condition
and securement.
(Continued on Next Page)
Any front spring shackle or hanger is cracked,
broken or has significant side wear at spring
eye.
Any front spring shackle or hanger is worn or
pinch bolt is stripped or missing so that spring
pin cannot be clamped tightly.
Any front spring mount is cracked or broken.
Any front spring mount-to-frame fastener is
loose or missing.
Frame is cracked at any spring mounting
location.
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
1.
Front Suspension
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
f. Pins and Bushings
Inspect pins and bushings as follows:
Note: Do not grease pins and bushings
before inspecting.
Inspect front spring pins and bushings for
wear and lubrication. Check for wear with
front axle loaded. Insert pry bar between
spring eye and fixed point at frame and
pull down. Measure total free play in pins
and bushings (see figure 13).
g. A-Frames and Bushings
Inspect A-frames and bushings for condition
and securement.
Any spring pin assembly will not accept
lubrication, or zerk (grease) fitting is damaged
or missing.
Rubber bushing(s) are split, deteriorated or
extruded from suspension joints.
(Continued on Next Page)
Total free play (up and down) of pins and
bushings exceeds 1/4 inch (two-pin type) or
1/8 inch (one-pin type). (See figure 13)
Inner sleeve or rubber bushing-type spring pin
assembly or assemblies are worn through, or
rubber bushing is excessively worn (rubber is
compacted or deteriorated, resulting in free
play between rubber and spring eye or inner
sleeve).
Rubber bushing(s) are worn excessively or
missing.
Any A-frame assembly is bent, damaged or
broken, or any fasteners or brackets are loose
or missing.
Any A-frame, bushing or pivot arm has more
than 0.05-inch free play at pivot point.
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
1.
Front Suspension
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
h. Ball Joints
Inspect ball joint(s) for condition, securement
and lubrication.
i.
U-Bolts
Inspect spring U-bolts for condition and
securement.
j.
Shock Absorbers
Inspect shocks for condition and securement.
Note: A very small amount of fluid staining
at the shock-piston shaft seal area is
normal due to the wiping function of the
shaft seal. This does not indicate a leaking
shock.
Zerk (grease) fitting is missing or damaged, or
ball joint will not take lubrication.
Any U-bolt is misaligned.
(Continued on Next Page)
Any ball joint has more than 3/32-inch axial
play.
Any ball joint nut is loose or missing, or cotter
pin is missing.
Ball joint to A-frame mounting is cracked,
loose or has been welded.
There is rust underneath U-bolt nuts,
indicating possibility of looseness.
Any U-bolt, seating plate, shock mount
bracket or fastener is loose, missing, cracked
or stripped.
Any shock is leaking fluid.
Any shock mounting or fastener is loose,
missing, cracked or broken.
Any shock is broken.
Any shock fails to function.
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
1.
Front Suspension
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
k. Springs
Inspect
front
springs
for
condition,
securement and alignment.
l. Wheel Seals
Check for condition and leakage.
There are any loose, missing, broken or worn
spring clips.
Any leaf spring or air-suspension ride height
is less than manufacturer’s specifications.
Either front spring saddle (if equipped) is worn
or missing.
Rubber bumper is missing.
Either front wheel seal is seeping.
Any spring leaf is broken, cracked or missing.
Spring eye is worn or spread such that
bushings are loose in spring eye.
Any coil spring(s) is non-OEM, broken or
insecurely mounted, or non-OEM blocks or
spacers are installed.
There is any misalignment of spring leaves or
other evidence that center pin is loose or
broken.
Either front coil or leaf spring is worn so that
rubber frame bumper is damaged or worn due
to frequent bottoming of front suspension.
Any alignment wedge is loose or damaged.
On any air bag type spring assembly, air bag
is damaged or leaking.
Either front wheel seal is damaged or leaking.
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
2.
Front Brakes
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
a. Brake Hoses
Inspect air and hydraulic front brake flexible
hoses for condition, securement and routing.
b. Lines
Inspect air and hydraulic brakes lines for
routing, securement and condition.
(Continued on Next Page)
Any front hydraulic brake flex hose or
connection is seeping or leaking fluid, or any
air brake hose is leaking air pressure.
Any front brake flex hose is kinked, collapsed,
bulging, has damaged plies/cord or is
damaged below outer covering.
Any front brake flex hose supporting brackets
are damaged or have loose fasteners.
Any front brake flex hose is rubbing against
other components or is improperly routed.
Any brake line is bent, crimped or damaged
significantly,
restricting
air
pressure
or
hydraulic fluid.
Any hydraulic brake line or connection is
seeping or leaking fluid, or any air brake line
is leaking air pressure.
Any brake line is rubbing against other
components or is improperly routed.
Any brake line is not of OEM material, size or
type.
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
2.
Front Brakes
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
c. Chambers
Inspect front brake chamber assemblies for
securement, condition and proper size.
d. Slack Adjusters
Inspect
slack
adjusters
and
S-cam
assemblies for wear, condition, operation and
securement.
Note:
See
(brake
adjustment),
for
procedure to check operation of ASAs.
(Continued on Next Page)
Any front brake chamber, mounting bracket or
hardware is cracked, bent, broken or missing.
Any front brake chamber or mounting fastener
is damaged, loose, missing or of the wrong
type.
Either front chamber is not OEM size and
stroke length.
Any portion of slack adjuster or S-cam is
missing, broken, cracked or worn beyond
limits (see figure 14 and figure 15).
S-cam snap ring is missing.
Slack adjuster has frozen or stripped worn
gear or ratchet assembly.
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
2.
Front Brakes
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
e. Push-Rods
Inspect push-rod assemblies for condition,
securement and alignment.
f. Linings
Inspect
linings
and
foundation
brake
hardware for contamination, wear, damage
and securement.
There is a significant difference in lining
thickness between the left and right sides.
(Continued on Next Page)
Any portion of push-rod assembly (locknut,
push-rod, clevis, pin or cotter pin) is loose,
missing or damaged.
Push-rod is rubbing against body of chamber,
or chamber is misaligned.
Push-rods on left and right sides are not
mounted in identical (same) slack adjuster
location hole, resulting in same effective slack
adjuster length.
Any foundation brake assembly does not
have at least one lining inspection hole.
For riveted-type shoes, front brake lining is
less than 3/16 inch thick (Q-type) or 1/4 inch
(Q-plus-type) above shoe table at the center
of the shoe.
For bonded-type shoes, front brake lining is
worn to within 1/16 inch of shoe table at the
center of the shoe.
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
2.
Front Brakes
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
g.
Disc Brake Pads
Inspect disc brake pads for contamination,
wear, damage and securement.
There is significant difference in pad thickness
between the left and right sides of the bus.
(Continued on Next Page)
Front brake lining is worn to within 1/16 inch
of any rivet.
Lining is broken, cracked or loose on shoe.
Lining is not proper size.
Friction surface is contaminated with oil,
grease or brake fluid.
There is any shimming material between
lining and shoe.
Shoe table or webbing is cracked or
damaged.
There is any loose, damaged or missing
foundation brake hardware within the drum.
Pad surface is contaminated, cracked,
broken or missing.
Thickness of friction material is less than 1/8
inch.
Pad wear is uneven end-to-end exceeding
3/32 inch.
Difference between the inboard and
outboard pads on one side is greater than
1/8 inch.
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
2.
Front Brakes
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
h. Drums
Inspect front brake drum(s) for condition and
size.
i. Rotors
Inspect brake rotor(s) for mounting, thickness
and condition.
(Continued on Next Page)
There is any crack (other than heat checks) in
any drum.
There is more than 0.060 inch wear in drum
friction surface (inside diameter is more than
0.120 inch over original).
There is any grease, oil or brake fluid on
inside of drum.
Drum is not mounted securely to hub, or
fasteners are loose.
Drum is not centered on hub causing it to be
more than 0.010 inch out of round
Rotor mounting is not secure or has run out
beyond
manufacturer’s
specifications,
causing a pulsating brake pedal.
Rotor has cracks (other than heat checks) or
other mechanical defects, or is contaminated
with oil, grease or brake fluid.
Rotor thickness is less than manufacturer’s
specifications stamped on rotor.
Any rotor friction surface is significantly
grooved or damaged.
D. UNDERNEATH BUS
2. Front Brakes
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
j.
Wheel Cylinders or Calipers
Inspect wheel
cylinders
or calipers for
seepage, leaks, mounting and condition.
(Continued on Next Page)
Any wheel cylinder or caliper is seeping,
leaking, not securely mounted, or has loose or
missing fasteners.
There is uneven lining or pad wear, rotor or
drum damage, evidence of dragging or other
evidence that any wheel cylinder or caliper
may be sticking.
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
2.
Front Brakes
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
k. Adjust Brakes
1) Any brakes (air or hydraulic) without
automatic adjusting capabilities must
be adjusted at each inspection using
the following procedure:
a) Tighten brake adjuster until wheel
locks up.
b) Back off brake adjuster until there
is a very slight drag on friction
surfaces.
2) For all MSA-equipped S-cam brakes,
each brake chamber push-rod travel
must be measured and brakes must
be
adjusted
at
every
required
inspection at all wheel positions (see
figure 15). Push-rod travel must not
exceed limits shown in chart 11.
(Continued on Next Page)
Any condition prevents proper adjustment of
manual adjusting brakes.
Any
MSA-equipped
S-cam
cannot
be
adjusted to bring push-rod travel within limits
shown in chart 11.
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
2.
Front Brakes
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
3) Do not adjust ASA-equipped brakes.
Push-rod travel must be measured
and must not exceed limits shown in
chart 11. If the push-rod travel
measurement exceeds the limits, the
foundation brakes, slack adjusters,
push-rods and chambers must all be
inspected and repaired or replaced, if
found defective. Correctly installed
and properly working ASAs should
keep the brakes in adjustment
throughout the life of the linings.
Any ASA is damaged or malfunctioning, or
push-rod travel exceeds the limits shown in
chart 11.
Figure 14
S-cam Bushing Up-and-Down Play
S-cam In-and-Out Play
Figure 15
PROCEDURE FOR MEASURING PUSH-ROD TRAVEL
Brake chamber push-rod travel shall not exceed maximum stroke specifications. Performance of the brake push-
rod travel inspection requires full application of the brake, with a minimum of 80 to 90 psi of air pressure application.
CAUTION: Chock wheels before commencing this inspection,
as vehicle emergency brake(s) must be off.
Note: Refer to chart 11 for maximum push-rod travel (stroke) at which brake adjustment is required.
With brakes off,
mark push-rod at
chamber.
Apply brakes and
measure distance of
mark from chamber.
Note: When brakes are properly
adjusted and fully applied, the slack
adjuster should be at an angle of 90°
as measured from centerline of
adjuster to push- rod.
Type
Maximum
Stroke
Maximum stroke with
brakes adjusted
Maximum stroke at which
brakes should be
adjusted
1-5/8
Should be as short as
possible without brakes
dragging
1-1/4
1-3/4
1-3/8
1-3/4
1-3/8
2-1/4
1-3/4
2-1/4
1-3/4
2-1/4
1-3/4
2-1/2
2-1/4
2-1/2
Should be as short as
possible without brakes
dragging
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
3-3/8
2-1/2
Should be as short as
possible without brakes
dragging
1-5/8
1-5/8
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
2-1/2
3-1/2
2-3/4
3-1/4
1-3/8
Should be as short as
possible without brakes
dragging
1-3/8
1-1/2
1-3/4
1-5/8
1-3/4
1-3/4
1-3/4
1-7/8
CLAMP TYPE BRAKE CHAMBER
AIR DISC BRAKES
ROTOCHAMBER
"LONG STROKE" CLAMP-TYPE
BRAKE CHAMBER
CHART 11
Dimensions in inches
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
3.
Engine Mounts, Transmission Mounts and Starter Mounting
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
a. Engine/Transmission Mounts
Inspect engine and transmission mounts for
condition and securement.
b. Starter Mounting
Inspect starter for securement and condition.
Any mounting fasteners are loose, missing or
broken.
Any mount is cracked or has deteriorated
rubber.
Any starter-mounting bolt, stud or nut is loose,
damaged, broken or missing.
Starter is damaged or loose.
Any starter cables are loose or bare, or any
positive cable could short to ground.
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
4.
Transmission
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
a. Transmission Bolts
Inspect transmission assembly and mounting
fasteners for condition and securement.
b. Linkage
Inspect transmission linkage for routing,
condition and securement.
c. Lines
Inspect transmission lines for securement,
routing and condition.
Any transmission assembly fastener is loose,
missing or damaged.
Modulator, Throttle Valve (TV) cable or
vacuum hose is routed where it is subject to
excessive heat or abrasion.
Any linkage hardware or fasteners are loose.
Modulator or TV cable is exposed, or casing
is damaged.
Vacuum modulator hose is deteriorated or
loose.
Any transmission line is unsecured.
(Continued on Next Page)
Transmission is not mounted securely to
flywheel housing.
There is any indication that any torque
converter bolt is loose or missing.
Linkage is bent, damaged, binding or severely
misadjusted.
Any linkage hardware or fasteners are
missing, or linkage is damaged, causing a
sticking or binding condition.
Vacuum-modulator hose is leaking or not
connected.
Any transmission line is improper type,
crimped, improperly routed, damaged or
leaking.
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
4.
Transmission
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
d. Filter
Inspect transmission external filter assembly
(if equipped) for securement and condition.
e. Cooler
Inspect transmission cooler (as equipped) for
securement and condition.
Mounting of external transmission cooler (if
equipped) is not secured or has loose or
missing fasteners.
(Continued on Next Page)
External filter or base is loose or leaking.
Transmission cooler is cracked or damaged,
or hoses and connections are leaking.
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
5.
Fluid Leaks
Note: Leaks and Seepage are types of fluid loss defined as follows:
“Leak” is enough fluid loss to cause dripping fluid. Leaking fluid can also be slung from rotating assemblies.
“Seepage” is fluid loss that may cause dampness or staining, but not dripping or slung fluid.
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
a. Oil
Inspect for engine oil leaks at all locations and
determine severity.
b. Coolant
Inspect all locations for coolant leaks.
Engine oil is seeping or slightly leaking onto
any location except exhaust system.
Engine oil leakage is causing deterioration of
any rubber parts, such as steering linkage
boots, hoses, etc.
There is a drip shield installed to divert leaking
oil from the exhaust system.
There is coolant seeping at radiator, hoses,
engine oil cooler, thermostat housing, head
gaskets, freeze plugs, reservoir, water pump
or other locations.
(Continued on Next Page)
Engine oil leakage is excessive.
Engine oil is dripping, slinging or being blown
onto any portion of exhaust system.
Coolant leakage is excessive.
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
5.
Fluid Leaks
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
c. Transmission
Inspect for transmission fluid leaks at all
locations and determine severity.
d. Power Steering
Inspect for power steering fluid leaks at all
locations and determine severity.
e. DEF
Inspect for DEF fluid leaks at all locations and
determine severity.
Transmission fluid is seeping or slightly
leaking onto any location except exhaust
system.
Transmission fluid is causing deterioration of
any rubber parts, such as steering linkage
boots, hoses, etc.
Power steering fluid is seeping.
Power steering fluid is causing deterioration of
any rubber parts, such as steering linkage
boots, hoses, etc.
DEF fluid is seeping.
Transmission fluid leakage is excessive.
Transmission fluid is dripping on any portion
of exhaust system.
Power steering fluid is leaking.
Power steering reservoir cap or dipstick is
missing.
DEF fluid is leaking.
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
6.
Fuel and DEF Tank
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
a. Leaks
Inspect fuel and DEF tank assembly for leaks.
b. Mounting
Inspect fuel and DEF tank mounting system
and barrier (if equipped) for securement and
condition.
(Continued on Next Page)
There is any fuel or DEF leakage from the
tank, sending unit, connections, vent or cap,
or cap is missing.
Any tank is cracked.
Any hose connection is loose at the tank.
Any portion of tank mounting system
(including support brackets, retaining straps
and chassis frame) is missing, loose, cracked
or broken.
Any tank mounting fasteners are loose or
missing.
Barrier assembly (if required) is damaged,
insecurely mounted or missing.
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
6.
Fuel and DEF Tank
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
c. Hoses
Inspect all fuel and DEF system lines, hoses
and under-bus components for routing,
secure mounting and condition.
Any line or hose is unsecured or improperly
routed, or subject to excessive heat or
abrasion.
Any line or hose is deteriorated or damaged
(including cracks or any damage that may
cause seepage or leaks), or clamps are loose
or missing.
Any fuel or DEF system filter, water separator
or other component is insecurely mounted,
cracked or damaged.
d. Wiring
Inspect fuel tank and DEF sending unit wiring
for securement, routing and condition.
Any portion of sending unit wiring (including
ground) or connections is unsecured, missing
insulation or routed, subject to excessive heat
or abrasion.
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
7.
Brake Equipment
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
a. Brake Lines
Inspect all brake hoses, lines and connections
for routing, securement and condition.
Note:
External layer weather cracking
shall not be a sole cause for rejection.
b. Brake Valves
Inspect
all
brake
system
valves
for
securement and condition.
c. Reservoir Mounting
Inspect reservoirs (air and vacuum tanks) for
securement and condition.
Any brake hose or line is unsecured.
(Continued on Next Page)
There is any audible air leak or visible
hydraulic brake fluid seepage or leak.
Any brake line or hose is improperly routed, or
subject to excessive heat or abrasion.
Any brake line or hose is deteriorated or
damaged to the point that failure could occur
(i.e., frayed, thin wall; rubber contaminated
with oil; crimped).
Any brake line or hose connection is loose.
There are any audible air leaks or visible
hydraulic fluid leaks or seepage from any
brake valve.
Any brake valve is not mounted securely, or is
cracked or damaged.
Any reservoir mounting, brackets, straps or
fasteners are cracked, loose or missing.
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
7.
Brake Equipment
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
d. Bleed Reservoirs
1) With air system fully charged, check
manual operation of safety pressure
relief valve.
2) Partially open manual petcock valve
on the first (wet) tank.
3) Allow draining of any moisture (water)
or contamination.
e. Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Perform a visual inspection of all ABS
components, including wiring, connectors and
controllers.
There is moisture in reservoir (desiccant-type
dryer only).
Safety relief valve leaks or does not release
pressure.
There is excessive sludge or oil contamination
in the reservoir (more than eight fluid ounces).
Reservoir leaks due to corrosion or is cracked.
Visual
inspection
reveals
that
ABS
components are loose, damaged, missing,
improperly routed or non-operational.
Note: Wiring from ABS controller(s) to
wheel speed sensor(s) that has been
abraded or otherwise damaged, exposing
any wire conductor or grounding sheath,
may cause failure of the antilock brake
system. This
damage
is
considered
severe.
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
8.
Driveline
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
a. Drive shafts
Inspect drive shafts for condition.
b. U-Joints
Prior to lubrication, inspect U-joints or
constant velocity (CV) joints (if equipped) for
condition, phasing (alignment of joints),
lubrication and presence of all hardware.
Any driveshaft balancing weight (if originally
equipped) is missing.
Driveshaft is assembled out of phase.
U-joints or CV joints are insufficiently
lubricated, or grease fitting is missing,
clogged or inaccessible.
(Continued on Next Page)
Any driveshaft is bent or seriously dented.
There are cracks or other damage that could
cause structural failure.
Any center bearing bracket crack equaling 50
percent or more of the original bracket width.
More than ½ inch vertical movement (with
hand pressure only) of shaft in the center
bearing carrier.
There is any missing hardware or fasteners in
any U-joint or CV joint assembly.
Any U-joint has significant cross-shaft-to-
bearing cup play, or CV joint has significant
play.
Any U-joint or CV joint shows evidence of
significant rusting of bearings.
Any bearing cup is loose in yoke.
Any U-joint is cracked or broken.
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
8.
Driveline
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
c. Yokes
Inspect driveshaft yokes for condition and
lubrication.
d. Hanger Bearings
Inspect
hanger
bearings
and
rubber
insulators for condition and securement.
e. Guards
Inspect for presence and condition
of
driveshaft guards.
Driveshaft splines are not lubricated.
Dust cap on yoke is missing.
Grease fitting is missing or clogged.
Cork washer in dust cap is missing.
Hanger
bearing
rubber
insulator
is
deteriorated, damaged or oil-soaked.
Hanger bearing support is misaligned.
Any driveshaft guard is bent or damaged.
(Continued on Next Page)
Any yoke has significant play in splines.
Any yoke is cracked or damaged.
Bearing outer race is loose in insulator, or
inner race is loose on shaft.
There is significant play in hanger bearing.
There is any loose, missing or damaged
hardware or fasteners in the hanger bearing
or support assembly.
Any driveshaft guard is missing or has loose
or damaged mounting fasteners.
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
8.
Driveline
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
f. Driveshaft Parking Brake
Inspect driveshaft parking brake assembly for
condition,
mounting,
securement
and
adjustment of linings, drum, linkage and all
other related hardware.
Lining is worn down to 2/32 inch from top of
rivet head.
Lining is contaminated with grease or oil.
Lining is broken, cracked or loose.
Drum is cracked or has excessive heat
damage or scoring of friction surface.
Any actuating or mounting hardware or
fastener is damaged, loose or missing.
Parking
brake
is
not
adjusted
per
manufacturer’s specifications.
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
9.
Rear Suspension
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
a. Axle Housing
Inspect axle housing for condition and
leakage.
b. Vent
Inspect condition of axle housing vent.
c. Differential
Inspect differential assembly for condition,
lubricant level and leakage.
Axle housing is seeping lubricant.
Vent cap is clogged.
Vent hose (if originally equipped) is cracked
or missing.
Lubricant level is low.
Differential gaskets or seals are seeping.
(Continued on Next Page)
Any portion of axle housing is cracked or bent.
Any portion of axle housing is leaking
lubricant due to cracks, porous metal or
defective welds.
There is any leakage at or around axle
housing ends.
Axle vent is not functional or is missing.
Differential gaskets or seals are leaking.
There is no lubricant in the differential.
Any
external
differential
hardware
or
fasteners are loose or missing.
Differential pinion yoke nut is loose or has
endplay
or
side
play
exceeding
manufacturer’s specifications.
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
9.
Rear Suspension
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
d. Springs
Inspect rear springs for condition, securement
and alignment.
e. U-Bolts
Inspect spring U-bolts for condition and
securement.
There are any loose, missing, broken or worn
spring clips.
Any leaf spring or air-suspension ride height
is less than manufacturer’s specifications.
Rubber frame bumper is missing.
Any U-bolt is misaligned.
(Continued on Next Page)
Any leaf spring is broken or missing.
On any type spring assembly, airbag is
damaged or leaking, or air lines and valving
are damaged or leaking.
Air ride pivot pins and bushings are loose.
There is any misalignment of spring leaves or
other evidence that centering pin is loose or
broken.
Either rear leaf spring is worn to the point that
suspension bottoming has damaged rubber
frame bumper.
There is rust underneath U-bolt nuts,
indicating possibility of looseness.
Any U-bolt, U-bolt seating plate, shock mount
bracket or nut is loose, missing, cracked or
stripped.
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
9.
Rear Suspension
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
f. Shock Absorbers
Inspect rear shocks for condition and
securement.
Note: A very small amount of fluid staining
at the shock-piston shaft seal area is
normal due to the wiping function of the
shaft seal. This does not indicate a leaking
shock.
g. Shackles
Inspect rear suspension shackles, spring
hangers and hanger pinch bolts for condition
and securement.
(Continued on Next Page)
Any shock is broken.
Any shock fails to function.
Any shock mounting or fastener is loose,
missing, cracked or broken.
Any shock is leaking fluid.
Any rear spring shackle or hanger is cracked
or broken.
Any rear spring shackle/hanger is worn, or
any pinch bolt is stripped/missing, preventing
the spring pin from being clamped tightly.
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
9.
Rear Suspension
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
h. Pins and Bushings
Inspect rear spring pins and bushings for wear
and lubrication. See figure 13 for shackle-type
system on checking play in pins and bushings.
For
other
types
of
pin
and
bushing
configurations, see manufacturer’s service
manual.
Any spring pin assembly will not accept
lubrication, or grease fitting is damaged or
missing.
(Continued on Next Page)
Inner sleeve on rubber-type spring pin
assemblies is worn through, or rubber
bushing is excessively worn (rubber is
compacted or deteriorated, resulting in free
play between rubber and spring eye or inner
sleeve).
Rear spring pin bushing (metal-type bushing)
is worn through.
Total free play (up and down) of pin and
bushing exceeds 1/8 inch for single pin type.
On system using two pins and bushings,
combined free play exceeds 1/4 inch.
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
9.
Rear Suspension
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
i. Hangers
Inspect hangers for mounting and condition.
j. Seals
Inspect rear wheel seals for condition and
leakage.
k. Wheel Bearings
Inspect rear wheel bearings for condition and
proper adjustment of bearings.
1) Raise rear wheels (wheels unloaded)
and release parking brake.
2) Grasp tire and attempt to rock wheel
assembly to check for movement.
Note: Rear wheel bearing in-out play
should be 0.000 inches.
There is seepage of oil or grease around axle
flange or wheel seal.
Any spring hanger or bracket is cracked or
broken, or any mounting fastener is loose or
missing.
Either rear wheel seal or axle flange is
damaged or leaking.
Any axle flange stud or nut is loose or missing.
There is any detectable looseness or
roughness in rear wheel bearings.
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
10. Rear Brakes
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
a. Hoses
Inspect rear brake flexible hoses for condition,
securement and routing.
b. Lines
Inspect air and hydraulic brake lines for
routing, securement and condition.
Brake line bracket(s) or securement system is
loose or missing.
(Continued on Next Page)
Any rear brake flex hose or connection is
seeping, leaking fluid or leaking air pressure.
Any rear brake flex hose is kinked, collapsed,
bulging, has damaged plies or is damaged
below outer covering.
Any rear brake flex hose supporting brackets
are damaged or have loose fasteners.
Any rear brake flex hose is rubbing on or
routed against other components.
Any brake line is bent, crimped or damaged,
restricting air pressure or hydraulic fluid.
Any brake line or connection is seeping or
leaking hydraulic fluid or leaking air pressure.
Any
brake
line
is
rubbing
on
other
components or is abraded.
Any brake line is not of OEM material, size or
type.
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
10. Rear Brakes
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
c. Chambers
Inspect rear brake chamber assemblies for
securement, condition and proper size.
d. Slack Adjusters
Inspect
slack
adjusters
and
S-cam
assemblies for wear, condition, operation and
securement.
Note: See section on brake adjustment for
procedure to check operation of ASA.
(Continued on Next Page)
Any rear chamber-mounting bracket or
hardware is cracked, bent, broken or missing.
Any rear brake chamber or mounting fastener
is damaged, loose, missing or of the wrong
type.
Either rear chamber is not OEM size and
stroke length.
Any portion of slack adjuster or S-cam is
missing, broken, cracked, worn beyond limits
or improperly installed.
S-cam shaft and/or S-cam bushing total wear
(up and down) is greater than 0.040 inch (see
figure 14).
S-cam in-and-out endplay is more than 0.060
inch (see figure 14).
S-cam snap ring is missing.
Slack adjuster has frozen or stripped worm
gear or ratchet assembly.
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
10. Rear Brakes
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
e. Push-Rods
Inspect push-rod assemblies for condition,
securement and alignment.
(Continued on Next Page)
Any portion of push-rod assembly (locknut,
push-rod, clevis, pin or cotter pin) is loose,
missing or damaged.
Push-rod is rubbing against body of chamber,
or chamber is misaligned.
Push-rods on left and right sides are not
mounted in identical (same) slack adjuster
location hole, resulting in same effective slack
adjuster length.
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
10. Rear Brakes
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
f. Linings
Inspect
linings
and
foundation
brake
hardware for contamination, wear, damage
and securement.
There is a significant difference in lining
thickness between the left and right sides.
Rear brake lining is less than five-sixteenths
(5/16) inch thick at center of shoe [on brake
blocks with original three-fourths (3/4) inch
thickness].
(Continued on Next Page)
Any foundation brake assembly does not
have at least one lining inspection hole.
For riveted-type shoes, rear brake lining is
less than 1/4 inch thick at center of shoe [on
brake blocks with original 3/4 inch thickness].
Rear brake lining is worn to within 1/16 inch of
any rivet.
For bonded type shoes, rear brake lining is
worn to within 1/16 inch of shoe table (at
center of shoe).
Lining is broken, cracked or loose on shoe.
Lining is not proper size.
Friction surface is contaminated with oil,
grease or brake fluid.
There is any shimming material between
lining and shoe.
Shoe table or webbing is cracked or
damaged.
There is any loose, damaged or missing
foundation brake hardware within the drum.
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
10. Rear Brakes
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
g. Disc Brake Pads
Inspect disc brake pads for contamination,
wear, damage and securement.
There is a significant difference in pad
thickness between the left and right sides of
the bus.
(Continued on Next Page)
Pad surface is contaminated, cracked, broken
or missing.
Thickness of friction material is less than 1/8
inch.
Pad wear is uneven end to end exceeding
3/32 inches.
Difference between the inboard and outboard
pads is greater than 1/8 inch.
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
10. Rear Brakes
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
h. Drums
Inspect rear brake drum(s) for condition and
oversize.
(Continued on Next Page)
There is any crack (other than heat checks) in
drum.
There is more than 0.060-inch wear in drum
friction surface (inside diameter is more than
0.120 inch greater than original).
There is any grease, oil or brake fluid on
inside of drum.
Drum is not mounted securely to hub, or
fasteners are loose.
Drum is not centered on hub, causing it to be
more than 0.010 inch out of round.
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
10. Rear Brakes
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
i. Rotors
Inspect rear brake rotor(s) for mounting,
thickness and condition.
j. Wheel Cylinders or Calipers
Inspect wheel cylinder(s) or caliper(s) for
seepage, leaks, mounting and condition.
Any wheel cylinder or caliper dust boot is
damaged or missing.
(Continued on Next Page)
Rotor is not secured or has run out beyond
manufacturer’s specifications, causing a
pulsating brake pedal.
Rotor has cracks (other than heat checks) or
other mechanical defects or is contaminated
with oil, grease or brake fluid.
Rotor thickness is less than manufacturer’s
specifications as stamped on rotor.
Any rotor friction surface is significantly
grooved or damaged.
Any wheel cylinder or caliper is seeping,
leaking, insecurely mounted or has loose or
missing fasteners.
There is uneven lining or pad wear, rotor or
drum damage, evidence of dragging or other
evidence that any wheel cylinder or caliper
may be sticking.
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
10. Rear Brakes
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
k. Adjust Brakes
1) Any brakes (air or hydraulic) without
automatic adjusting capabilities must
be adjusted at each inspection using
the following procedure:
a) Tighten brake adjuster until wheel
locks up.
b) Back off brake adjuster until there
is very slight drag on friction
surfaces.
2) MSA-equipped
brakes
must
be
adjusted at every required inspection
at all wheel positions (see figure 15).
Push-rod travel must not exceed limits
shown in chart 11.
(Continued on Next Page)
Any damage or condition prevents proper
adjustment of manual adjusting brakes.
Any
MSA-equipped
brakes
cannot
be
adjusted to bring push-rod travel within limits
shown in chart 11 of this manual.
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
10. Rear Brakes
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
3) Do not adjust brakes equipped with
ASAs. Push-rod travel must be
measured and must not exceed limits
shown in chart 11. If the push-rod
travel measurement exceeds the
limits, the foundation brakes, slack
adjusters, push-rods and chambers
must all be inspected and repaired or
replaced, if found defective. Correctly
installed and properly working ASAs
should keep the brakes in adjustment
throughout
the life of the linings.
Any ASA is damaged or malfunctioning, or
push-rod travel exceeds the limits shown in
chart 11.
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
11. Body Securement and Structure
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
a. Body Hold-downs
Inspect for securement and condition of all
body hold-downs, chassis cowl mounts and
frame pads. Body hold-downs include any
J-bolt, U-bolt or clamp-type hold-down used
to secure body to chassis frame.
b. Floor
Inspect condition of floor structure, sills and
braces.
One or two body hold-downs are loose or
misaligned, or there are any cracks or
stripped fasteners at floor securement
points.
Padding between frame rails and floor sills
is misaligned.
There are any minor cracks in floor sills,
braces or welds.
(Continued on Next Page)
Any OEM-installed body hold-down or cowl
mount is missing.
Three or more body hold-downs are loose,
cracked, stripped, misaligned or have
missing hardware.
There are any holes or cracks in floor sheet
metal,
creating
an
opening
to
the
passenger compartment.
Entire cross-section of any floor sill or brace
is broken.
There is any broken weld or mounting of a
floor sill or brace, resulting in complete
separation of more than one foot in length.
There is any broken weld or loose mounting
of the floor bracing, K-member, etc., at the
front under the driver, center and step well
areas (or “cab” area).
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
11. Body Securement and Structure
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
c. Outriggers
Inspect body outriggers and hardware for
condition and securement.
d. Braces
Inspect for condition and securement of all
chassis and body braces.
e. Skirts
Inspect
body
skirts
(and
luggage
compartments, if equipped) for securement
and condition.
f. Mud Flaps
If equipped, inspect mud flaps according to
manufacturer’s specifications.
g. Frame Rails
Inspect condition of chassis frame rails,
cross
members
and
all
hardware
attachment points.
There are any minor cracks in bracing
underneath the body.
Body
skirt,
skirt
brace
or
luggage
compartment has minor cracks, broken
sheet metal or mounting points.
Any mud flap is missing.
Any OEM-installed outrigger is missing, or
body outrigger is cracked or has loose or
missing hardware.
Any bumper brace is broken, cracked or
missing.
Luggage compartment door-latch, hinge or
lock is sticking, damaged or malfunctioning.
Any mud flap is loose or damaged and may
detach while bus is in route.
There is any crack in either frame rail or any
cross-member.
There is any loose or missing rivet or other
fastener securing a cross-member to the
frame.
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
12. Exhaust System
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
a. Exhaust Leaks
Inspect for condition and securement. With
engine running at operating temperature,
inspect exhaust system for leaks.
b. Mounting
Inspect mounting of the exhaust system.
Mufflers and Diesel Particulate Filter
(DPF)
Inspect condition of the muffler and DPF.
d. DEF Components
Inspect DEF components.
e. Tailpipe
Inspect condition of tailpipe and ensure that
it extends beyond the rear bumper and
exits to the left of the left frame rail (for
buses
manufactured
since
1998).
If
equipped with regenerative-type exhaust
system or for type D rear engine buses, see
model year specifications for tailpipe
exceptions.
There is any physical damage to exhaust
system, not restricting flow or causing
leaks.
Any exhaust system hanger is not securely
mounted or any exhaust pipe or clamp is
loose.
The tailpipe is cracked.
There is other significant physical damage
to the tailpipe.
Any leakage is audible or can be felt around
any portion of the exhaust system,
including manifold, pipe sections or any
junction.
Any exhaust hanger is missing, broken or
detached from exhaust system or frame
mounting point.
The muffler or DPF is leaking, restricted or
damaged.
DEF tank lines or injector is loose,
damaged or leaking fluid.
The tailpipe is leaking, or does not extend
to at least the rear outer surface of the rear
bumper, or the tailpipe extends more than
two inches beyond the rear outer surface of
the rear bumper (see figure 16), or the
tailpipe does not exit to the left of the left
frame rail.
Figure 16
Tailpipe Length
Note: The end of the tailpipe (see vertical line touching
rearmost point of tailpipe in illustration at left) must
extend beyond the rear outer surface of the
bumper for a distance no more than two inches.
Two inches
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
13. Wheels and Tires
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
a. Tread Depth
Inspect and measure all tires for tread depth
and record measurements on inspection
form.
(Continued on Next Page)
Tread depth of any tire is less than:
•
Front: 4/32 inch
•
Rear: 2/32 inch
Tread depth is measured at three points
spaced
equally
around
the
circumference of the tire in the same
major tread groove. Do not measure at
wear bars. Measurements for all three
points must fall below the limits listed
above before tire is required to be taken
out of service. Measurements shall be
taken at the most worn major tread
groove of the tire.
There is evidence of any regrooved tire.
Any front tire is recapped or regrooved.
There is evidence that any tire has been
regrooved using a procedure not
approved by tire manufacturer or dealer.
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
13. Wheels and Tires
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
b. Pressure
With tires cold, check pressures of all tires
and record measurements on the inspection
form.
c. Damage
Inspect for damage to wheels and tires.
Note: Weather cracking shall not be a
sole cause for rejection.
Any valve cap is missing.
There is foreign material in the tire tread that
could cause damage or loss of air pressure.
(Continued on Next Page)
Pressure in any tire is less than 20 percent
below
the
maximum
cold
inflation
pressure stated on sidewall of the tire.
Pressure in any tire is more than 5 percent
above
the
maximum
cold
inflation
pressure stated on sidewall of the tire.
There is a difference of more than 20
percent in pressure between any tires on
a particular axle.
There are any cuts, abrasions or other
damage to tire sidewall, resulting in
exposed or damaged cord.
There is any evidence of separation,
bulges (other than normal manufacturer
bulge) or other damage within the carcass
of the tire.
Any cracks run around the bead or
sidewall of the tire.
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
13. Wheels and Tires
(Continued on Next Page)
There
is
mismatching
of
inner and outer
dual
tire
diameters greater
than 3/8 inch.
There is any tire
marked for use
other
than
highway use.
Any tire is not of
proper type, size
and
minimum
load
rating
according
to
Mississippi
Specifications.
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
13. Wheels and Tires
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
e. Alignment
Inspect
tires for
evidence
of
proper
alignment.
f. Wheel Hardware
1) Inspect for presence, type, condition
and
securement
of
all
wheel
hardware.
2) Check for proper spacing of rear
dual wheels and tires (proper spacer
width).
Any tire is feather-edged, cupped or has
uneven tread wear.
Lateral run-out of any tire/rim assembly
exceeds 1/4 inch.
(Continued on Next Page)
Not all tires on an axle are of same type
(i.e., lug or rib) and size.
Radial and bias ply tires are intermixed
on the same axle.
Tires/wheels are grossly misaligned,
affecting steering control.
There is improper matching of rims and
lock rings.
There is evidence of slippage of wheel
assembly on cast spoke hub.
Stud holes are elongated.
Any wheel nut, stud or clamp is loose, or
there is rust or corrosion, indicating
possible looseness.
D.
UNDERNEATH BUS
13. Wheels and Tires
Procedures/Specifications
Order repaired (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
Any wheel, nut, stud or clamp is broken,
stripped or missing.
Any
improper
spacer
is
installed
between dual wheels.
Any bus built since October 1987 is not
equipped with disc-type (Budd) wheels.
3)
Inspect for correct wheel color.
(Black, Chrome, or NSBY). EVs may
have
Blue
Rims.
MFSAB
are
exempt.
Wheel(s) not painted the correct color.
4) Inspect for correct wheel type.
Incorrect wheel is installed on any axle
or hub.
Note: Hub-pilot and stud-pilot
wheels are not interchangeable.
E.
LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE
(OPTIONAL)
Inspection Procedures:
Repair (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
This section of the form is for the convenience
of school districts. School districts should
implement
their
own
lubrication
and
maintenance policies and procedures.
(Continued on Next Page)
E.
LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE
(OPTIONAL)
Inspection Procedures:
Repair (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
This section of the form is for the convenience
of school districts. School districts should
implement
their
own
lubrication
and
maintenance policies and procedures.
F.
ROAD TEST
1.
Brake Performance
Inspection Procedures:
Repair (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
a. Parking Brake
Check for proper operation of parking brake
as follows:
Apply parking brake. Place automatic
transmission gear selector in drive and
speed up the engine to approximately
1,200 RPM. Vehicle should not move
forward.
b. Stopping Distance and Equalization
1) Stopping
distance
measurement
methods.
The following stopping distance
requirements should be met when
stopping the vehicle on a level, dry,
smooth, hard surface that is free of
loose material from a speed of 20
mph:
a)
Stopping
distance
can
be
determined
by
use
of
a
decelerometer
in
accordance
with procedures outlined in 49
CFR § 393.52.
Note: Buses equipped with Rear Diesel
Engine and Allison World Transmission
should be checked at approximately
900 RPM.
(Continued on Next Page)
Vehicle moves forward.
Decelerometer
reading
is
not
within
specifications set forth in 49 CFR § 393.52
for buses with GVWR of 10,000 pounds or
less (Type A bus) or buses with GVWR
of 10,001 pounds or more (Type C and D
buses).
F.
ROAD TEST
1.
Brake Performance
Inspection Procedures:
Repair (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
OR
b) Stopping distance (at 20 mph
from
point
of
brake
pedal
application) maximum of 25 feet
for buses with GVWR of 10,000
pounds or less (Type A bus) and
maximum of 35 feet for buses
with GVWR of 10,001 pounds or
more (Type C and D buses).
c) Check for tire flat spotting before
and after conducting this test.
Note:
Use
of
either
decelerometer
measurement
or
stopping
distance
measurement is acceptable. Lockup of
brakes is discouraged, as it may cause
extended stopping distances and tire
damage (flat spotting).
2) Equalization test.
Check for excessive brake pulling
during the stopping distance test.
(Note: Pull is excessive if steering
pulls sharply and/or bus will not stop
within a lane 12 feet wide).
Flat spotting noted, but does not exceed
minimum tread depths noted on page 158 of
this manual.
Bus pulls, but stops, within a lane 12 feet
wide.
Note: Remove hands from steering
wheel while conducting the brake
equalization test.
Distance to stop is greater than 25 feet for
buses with GVWR of 10,000 pounds or
less (Type A bus), and distance to stop is
greater than 35 feet for buses with GVWR
of 10,001 pounds or more (Type C and D
buses).
Flat spotting exceeds minimum tread
depths noted on page 158 of this manual.
Flat spotting causes any tire to fail
inspection.
Bus pulls sharply and will not stop within a
lane 12 feet wide.
F.
2. Engine, Transmission and Driveline
ROAD TEST
Inspection Procedures:
Repair (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
a. Engine Performance & Governor
Check for starting, color and quantity of
exhaust
smoke,
proper
idle,
stalling,
missing/skipping or hesitation, performance
when accelerating and shutdown of engine.
b. Automatic Transmission
Check operation of shifter and transmission.
Engine will not start, is difficult to start or
will not shut down.
Engine hesitates upon acceleration,
stalls, misfires or performs poorly.
Any engine/emissions system warning
lights or alarms are on, indicating a
mechanical safety condition.
Up and down shifting is excessive, or
shifts are hard.
Transmission will not shift up and down
through all gears.
Transmission is slipping or noisy.
Shift
points
are
not
within
manufacturer’s specifications.
F.
3.
Steering and Handling
ROAD TEST
Inspection Procedures:
Repair (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
a. Free Play
Check for free play in steering.
b. Power Assist
Check power steering assist effort when
turning to the left or right.
c. Turning Radius
Check and compare the left turning radius to
the right turning radius.
There is a minor difference between the
left turning radius and the right turning
radius.
(Continued on Next Page)
There is excessive wandering or shimmy
due to free play in steering.
Bus wanders and requires excessive
steering correction or effort to maintain
straight-ahead driving.
There is no power assist.
Bus is hard to turn to the left or right.
There is jerking in the steering wheel when
turning to the left or right.
There is a significant difference between the
left turning radius and the right turning
radius.
F.
3.
Steering and Handling
ROAD TEST
Inspection Procedures:
Repair (or note) if:
Out-of-Service if:
d. Steering Column
Check up-and-down movement of steering
column.
e. Tracking
Check vehicle steering recovery from left
and right turns, wandering on rough or
crowned roads, and tracking and pulling
when driving straight ahead (not when
stopping).
There is poor recovery on turns.
There is minor pulling in the steering.
Up-and-down movement is greater than
one inch.
There is no recovery on turns.
Bus does not track properly (front and rear
wheels are not in line).
Bus wanders and requires excessive
steering correction or effort to maintain
straight-ahead driving.
BUS AIR CONDITIONING PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE WORKSHEET
DATE:
TECHNICIAN:
BUS NO:
Inspection Schedule: A = Annually; S = Seasonal; M = Monthly
MILEAGE:
UNDER HOOD INSPECTION
PASS
FAIL
ACTION
INSPECTION
CHECK COMPRESSOR MOUNTING HARDWARE
A
CHECK BELT(S) TENSION(S)
M
CHECK FITTINGS – TIGHT; NO OIL DEPOSITS
S
CHECK REFRIGERANT HOSES – SECURE; NO CHAFING
S
CHECK COMPRESSOR CLUTCH AIR GAP AND CONDITION
S
IF A/C SYSTEM MALFUNCTION CHECK HEAD PRESSURES
S
RECORD SYSTEM HEAD PRESSURES
HIGH SIDE
LOW SIDE
S
CONDENSOR INSPECTION
CLEAN AND INSPECT COIL ASSEMBLY
S
CHECK FAN MOTOR CONDITION AND OPERATION
S
CHECK CONDENSER MOUNTING HARDWARE
A
CHECK ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS – POSITIVE AND GROUND
S
INSPECT CONDENSER METAL HOUSING
A
CHECK MOISTURE INDICATOR AT SIGHT GLASS (DRY)
S/M
CHECK REFRIGERANT LEVEL AT SIGHT GLASS (CLEAR)
S
EVAPORATOR INSPECTION
REPLACE/CLEAN RETURN AIR FILTER
S/M
CHECK BLWOER THREE SPEED OPERATION
S
CHECK FOR VIBRATION
A
CHECK EVAPORATOR MOUNTING HARDWARE
A
CHECK EVAPORATOR DRAIN PAN
S
CHECK CONDENSATE DRAING OPERATION
S
CHECK CONDENSATE INSULATION TAPE ON TXV FITTINGS
A
INSPECT AIR OUTLET LOUVERS
A
CLEAN COVER AND RETURN AIR GRILL
S
GENERAL INSPECTION
CHECK CONNECTIONS AT A/C ELECTRICAL PANEL
S
CHECK FAN SPEED SWITHC OPERATION
S
CHECK THERMOSTAT OPERATION
S
LEAK TEST ALL FITTINGS AND HOSES (LOW REFRIGERANT)
S
STATUTORY REQUIREMENT FOR SAFE TRANSPORTATION OF STUDENTS
§ 37-41-53. Inspections and safety requirements for motor vehicles used for public school district transportation;
condemnation of unsafe school district buses; penalties for operation of condemned bus.
(1) Each school board, person, firm or corporation transporting public school district children on the public roads, streets and
highways of the state with motor vehicles shall have the motor vehicles inspected according to regulations promulgated by the
State Department of Education. Each motor vehicle shall be inspected by a competent mechanic to be safe for transporting pupils
on the roads, streets and highways of the state before it is released for such purpose. If the motor vehicle is found to be unsafe
for transporting pupils, then it shall be properly repaired or adjusted as necessary before being used to transport pupils. The
provisions of this subsection shall not apply to vehicles owned by individuals and under private contract to the school district and
used exclusively for transporting members of their immediate families.
(2) The State Department of Education may inspect, at its discretion, any school bus used for transporting school district pupils
to and from the public schools or for activity purposes to determine the safety of such motor vehicle for operation on the roads,
streets and highways of this state. In the event a vehicle is inspected and is found to be unsafe for transporting pupils, a report
shall be filed with the appropriate school district official indicating its deficiencies with recommendations for correcting such
deficiencies.
(3) If it is determined that any school district buses are in such defective condition as to constitute an emergency safety hazard,
those buses may be condemned and removed from service and shall not be returned to service until adequate repairs are
completed and the buses are reinspected by the State Department of Education. Any school district official who approves the
operation of any school bus that has been removed from service under the conditions listed above, prior to being reinspected by
the State Department of Education, shall be guilty of a misdemeanor and, upon conviction, shall be punished by imprisonment in
the county jail for a period not to exceed sixty (60) days, or a fine of not less than Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) nor more than
One Thousand Dollars ($1,000.00), or by both such fine and imprisonment, in the discretion of the court.
§ 37-41-57. Promulgation of regulations governing design and operation of school buses.
The State Board of Education shall adopt and enforce regulations not inconsistent with the traffic laws and regulations of this state
to govern the design and operation of all school buses used for the transportation of school children when owned and operated
by any school board or privately owned and operated under contract with any school board in this state. Such regulations shall
by reference be made a part of any such contract with a school board. Every school board, its officers and employees, and every
person employed under contract by a school board shall be subject to said regulations.
Any officer or employee of any school board who violates any of said regulations or fails to include the obligation to comply with
said regulations in any contract executed by them on behalf of a school board shall be guilty of misconduct and subject to removal
from office or employment. Any person operating a school bus under a contract with a school board who fails to comply with any
of said regulations shall be guilty of breach of contract and such contract shall be cancelled after notice and hearing by the
responsible officers of such school board.
MISSISSIPPI SCHOOL BUS INSPECTION FORM
Bus#
Mileage
RO#
Date
Chassis/Body
Capacity
Model Year
School District
Shop Location
Status Codes:
âś“ = item is OK;
X = item needs repair or as noted;
O = out of service;
N/A = Not
Status
Code
INSPECTION ITEMS
COMMENTS
(Note Specific Deficiencies)
Tech.
Initials
A. INSIDE BUS
1. Emergency Equipment - Fire Ext. (pressure/tag/mount), First Aid Kit,
Body Fluid Cleanup Kit and Reflectors
2. Registration and Insurance Card
3. Neutral Safety Switch, Shifter and Noise Abatement Switch
4. Engine Controls - Key Switch, Accelerator and Engine Shutdown
5. Gauges, Indicators, Dash and Switch Panel Lights, Engine Warning
Lights/ Buzzers and ABS Warning Light
6. Air Brake System - Gauge(s), Build-Up, Governor, Park Brake,
Adjustment, Air Leaks, Low Air Warning, PP-1 Pop-Off and Pedal
7. Hydraulic Brakes - Warning Light, Gauge, Pedal Travel and
Fade, Power Assist and Park Brake
8. Windshield Wipers and Washers - Operation, Park and Blades
9. Heaters, Defrosters, Auxiliary Dash or Header Fan(s)
10. Dome and Step Well Lights
11. Service Door - Operation, Control and Overhead Pad
12. Horns
13. Mirror Adjustment and Condition - Rear vision, Cross-view, Side-view and Interior
14. Driver’s Seat and Seat Belt
15. Passenger Seats - Frames, Mounting, Pads, Cuts, Bottoms, Modesty Panels,
Stanchions, Restraining Barriers, Passenger Securement Devices,& Webbing Cutter
16. Emergency Doors, Windows, Hatches and Passenger Check System
Operation, Buzzers, Labeling and Overhead Pad
17. Windshield, Side and Rear Windows - Cracks, Fogging, Latches and Visor
18. Wheelchair Lift, Door and Securement System - (if equipped)
19. Two-Way Radio Operation - (if equipped)
20. Interior Wiring, Cab Hoses and Fire Wall Seals
21. General Condition of Bus Interior - Floor, Step well, Grab Rail(s),
Paneling, Broom Mounting, Loose Objects Secured and Engine Cover
B. OUTSIDE BUS
1. Headlights, Turn Signals, Hazard, Brake, Tail, Backup
Lights, Backup Alarm and Park Lights
2. Clearance, Side Marker, ID Lights, Reflectors and Strobe Light
3. Pupil Warning Lights
4. Stop Arm(s) and Student Crossing Arm - Wiring, Air or Vacuum Leak and Decal
5. General Condition of Bus Exterior - Mirrors, Bumpers, Body Damage, Paint
Reflective Marking, Lettering, Emergency Door, Engine Hood and Cleanliness
C. ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1. Steering - Play, Column, Steering Gear Box Mounting, Pitman Arm,
Drag Link, Steering Arm, Tie Rod & Ends and Idler Arm
2. Batteries - Hold Down, Terminals, Cables, Cleanliness, Slide Tray and Load Test
3. Fluid Levels and Condition - Brake, Power Steering,
Oil, Transmission, Windshield Washer, Coolant (Antifreeze
°F)
4. Belts and All Hoses - Tightness, Condition, Routing and Belt Alignment
5. Accessory Mounting and Condition – Power Steering Pump, Air Compressor and
Filter, Water Pump, Fan, Alternator and Air Cleaner (Restriction gauge, if equipped)
(H2O)
6. Wiring - Routing and Condition
7. Fuel System and Lines
8. Radiator - Mounting, Cap, Reservoir and Fan Shroud
Propulsion
Electric
Alternative Fuel
Conventional Fuel
Type School
Bus
MFSAB
Status
Code
INSPECTION ITEMS
COMMENTS
(Note Specific Deficiencies)
Tech.
Initials
D. UNDERNEATH BUS
1. Front Suspension - I-Beam, U-Bolts, Springs, Spring Mounts, Shackles, Pins and
Bushings, Shocks, Kingpins, Wheel Bearings, Seals, A-Frames, Bushings and Ball
Joints
2. Front Brakes - Hoses, Lines, Chambers, Slack Adjusters, Push-rods, Linings, Drums,
Rotors and Wheel Cylinders or Calipers. Check and Adjust MSA-Equipped Brakes.
Do Not Adjust ASA-Equipped Brakes. Disc Brakes
3. Engine Mounts, Transmission Mounts and Starter Mounting
4. Transmission - Bolts, Linkage, Lines, Filter and Cooler
5. Fluid Leaks - Oil, Coolant, Transmission and Power Steering
6. Fuel and DEF Tank - Leaks, Mounting, Hoses, Wiring and cap
7. Brake Equipment – ABS, Lines, Valves, Reservoir Mounting and Bleed Reservoirs
8. Driveline - Shafts, U-Joints, Yokes, Hanger Bearings, Guards Driveshaft and Park brake
9. Rear Suspension - Axle Housing, Vent, Differential, Springs, U-Bolts, Shocks, Spring
Shackles, Pins and Bushings, Hangers, Seals and Wheel Bearings
10.Rear Brakes - Hoses, Lines, Chambers, Slack Adjusters, Push-rods, Linings, Drums,
Rotors and Wheel Cylinders or Calipers. Check and Adjust MSA-Equipped Brakes.
Do Not Adjust ASA-Equipped Brakes. Disc Brakes
11.Body Securement and Structure - Hold Downs, Floor, Outriggers, Braces,
Skirts, Mud Flaps and Chassis Frame Rails
12.Exhaust System - Leaks, Mounting, Muffler, Tailpipe and DEF, DPF System
13.Wheels and Tires - Tread Depth, Pressure, Damage, Matching, Alignment
and Wheel Hardware
E. LUBRICATION & MAINTENANCE (OPTIONAL)
1. Change Oil and Replace Oil Filter(s)
Qts.
2. Replace Fuel Filter(s) Primary/Secondary and Drain Separator
3. Replace Transmission Filter(s)
Qts.
4. Replace Air Compressor Filter (if applicable)
5. Replace Power Steering Filter
Pts.
6. Replace Engine Air Cleaner Filter
7. Replace Coolant Filter (if applicable)
8. Test Starting and Charging System
Amps
Volts
9. Lubricate Chassis and Body
Lbs.
10.Air Conditioning If equipped, perform A/C system preventive maintenance
according to manufacturer recommendations and district procedure.
F. ROAD TEST
1. Brake Performance - Park Brake, Stopping Distance and Equalization
2. Engine, Transmission and Driveline - Engine Performance, Governor and Shifting
3. Steering and Handling -Free Play, Power Assist, Column, Tracking and Turning Radius
Comments:
Tread Depth
Air Pressure
Tread Depth
Air Pressure
RRO
/32
PSI
RF
/32
PSI
RRI
/32
PSI
LRI
/32
PSI
LF
/32
PSI
LRO
/32
PSI
NOTE: Follow the manufacturer’s inspection and maintenance procedures for any equipment not noted on this form.
Inspector’s Signature:
Inspector’s Printed Name:
Shop Foreman or Supervisor’s Initials:
Printed Name:
Bus Returned to Service Date:
MISSISSIPPI SCHOOL BUS INSPECTION FORM
Bus#_24-01
Mileage_68,000
RO#_23-1234
Date
10/5/2023
Chassis/Body
IC/Thomas/BB
Capacity
Model Year
School District-MDE
Shop Location-Jackson
Propulsion Electric
Alternative Fuel_X
Conventional Fuel
Status Codes:
âś“ = item is OK;
X = item needs repair or as noted;
O = out of service;
N/A = Not
Status
Code
INSPECTION ITEMS
COMMENTS
(Note Specific Deficiencies)
Tech.
Initials
A. INSIDE BUS
âś“
1. Emergency Equipment - Fire Ext. (pressure/tag/mount), First Aid Kit,
Body Fluid Cleanup Kit and Reflectors
âś“
2. Registration and Insurance Card
âś“
3. Neutral Safety Switch, Shifter and Noise Abatement Switch
âś“
4. Engine Controls - Key Switch, Accelerator and Engine Shutdown
âś“
5. Gauges, Indicators, Dash and Switch Panel Lights, Engine Warning
Lights/ Buzzers and ABS Warning Light
âś“
6. Air Brake System - Gauge(s), Build-Up, Governor, Park Brake,
Adjustment, Air Leaks, Low Air Warning, PP-1 Pop-Off and Pedal
N/A
7. Hydraulic Brakes - Warning Light, Gauge, Pedal Travel and
Fade, Power Assist and Park Brake
âś“
8. Windshield Wipers and Washers - Operation, Park and Blades
âś“
9. Heaters, Defrosters, Auxiliary Dash or Header Fan(s)
âś“
10. Dome and Step Well Lights
âś“
11. Service Door - Operation, Control and Overhead Pad
âś“
12. Horns
âś“
13. Mirror Adjustment and Condition - Rear vision, Cross-view, Side-view and Interior
âś“
14. Driver’s Seat and Seat Belt
âś“
15. Passenger Seats - Frames, Mounting, Pads, Cuts, Bottoms, Modesty Panels,
Stanchions, Restraining Barriers, Passenger Securement Devices,& Webbing Cutter
âś“
16. Emergency Doors, Windows, Hatches and Passenger Check System
Operation, Buzzers, Labeling and Overhead Pad
âś“
17. Windshield, Side and Rear Windows - Cracks, Fogging, Latches and Visor
N/A
18. Wheelchair Lift, Door and Securement System - (if equipped)
âś“
19. Two-Way Radio Operation - (if equipped)
âś“
20. Interior Wiring, Cab Hoses and Fire Wall Seals
âś“
21. General Condition of Bus Interior - Floor, Step well, Grab Rail(s),
Paneling, Broom Mounting, Loose Objects Secured and Engine Cover
B. OUTSIDE BUS
âś“
1. Headlights, Turn Signals, Hazard, Brake, Tail, Backup
Lights, Backup Alarm and Park Lights
X
2. Clearance, Side Marker, ID Lights, Reflectors and Strobe Light
LF corner not working
RM
âś“
3. Pupil Warning Lights
âś“
4. Stop Arm(s) and Student Crossing Arm - Wiring, Air or Vacuum Leak and Decal
âś“
5. General Condition of Bus Exterior - Mirrors, Bumpers, Body Damage, Paint
Reflective Marking, Lettering, Emergency Door, Engine Hood and Cleanliness
C. ENGINE COMPARTMENT
âś“
1. Steering - Play, Column, Steering Gear Box Mounting, Pitman Arm,
Drag Link, Steering Arm, Tie Rod & Ends and Idler Arm
âś“
2. Batteries - Hold Down, Terminals, Cables, Cleanliness, Slide Tray and Load Test
âś“
3. Fluid Levels and Condition - Brake, Power Steering,
Oil, Transmission, Windshield Washer, Coolant (Antifreeze
°F)
X/O
4. Belts and All Hoses - Tightness, Condition, Routing and Belt Alignment
X-main belt, O-A/C belt
RM
âś“
5. Accessory Mounting and Condition – Power Steering Pump, Air Compressor and
Filter, Water Pump, Fan, Alternator and Air Cleaner (Restriction gauge, if equipped)
(H2O)
âś“
6. Wiring - Routing and Condition
âś“
7. Fuel System and Lines
âś“
8. Radiator - Mounting, Cap, Reservoir and Fan Shroud
Type School
Bus X
MFSAB
Status
Code
INSPECTION ITEMS
COMMENTS
(Note Specific Deficiencies)
Tech.
Initials
D. UNDERNEATH BUS
âś“
1. Front Suspension - I-Beam, U-Bolts, Springs, Spring Mounts, Shackles, Pins and
Bushings, Shocks, Kingpins, Wheel Bearings, Seals, A-Frames, Bushings and Ball
Joints
O
2. Front Brakes - Hoses, Lines, Chambers, Slack Adjusters, Push-rods, Linings, Drums,
Rotors and Wheel Cylinders or Calipers. Check and Adjust MSA-Equipped Brakes.
Do Not Adjust ASA-Equipped Brakes. Disc Brakes
Less than ÂĽ inch (Q Plus)
JM
âś“
3. Engine Mounts, Transmission Mounts and Starter Mounting
âś“
4. Transmission - Bolts, Linkage, Lines, Filter and Cooler
âś“
5. Fluid Leaks - Oil, Coolant, Transmission and Power Steering
âś“
6. Fuel and DEF Tank - Leaks, Mounting, Hoses, Wiring and cap
X
7. Brake Equipment – ABS, Lines, Valves, Reservoir Mounting and Bleed Reservoirs
Bleed tanks
JM
âś“
8. Driveline - Shafts, U-Joints, Yokes, Hanger Bearings, Guards Driveshaft and Park brake
âś“
9. Rear Suspension - Axle Housing, Vent, Differential, Springs, U-Bolts, Shocks, Spring
Shackles, Pins and Bushings, Hangers, Seals and Wheel Bearings
âś“
10.Rear Brakes - Hoses, Lines, Chambers, Slack Adjusters, Push-rods, Linings, Drums,
Rotors and Wheel Cylinders or Calipers. Check and Adjust MSA-Equipped Brakes.
Do Not Adjust ASA-Equipped Brakes. Disc Brakes
âś“
11.Body Securement and Structure - Hold Downs, Floor, Outriggers, Braces,
Skirts, Mud Flaps and Chassis Frame Rails
âś“
12.Exhaust System - Leaks, Mounting, Muffler, Tailpipe and DEF, DPF System
O
13.Wheels and Tires - Tread Depth, Pressure, Damage, Matching, Alignment
and Wheel Hardware
R/F 1/32 inch, and low air
pressure
RM
E. LUBRICATION & MAINTENANCE (OPTIONAL)
X
1. Change Oil and Replace Oil Filter(s)
Qts.
JM
X
2. Replace Fuel Filter(s) Primary/Secondary and Drain Separator
JM
N/A
3. Replace Transmission Filter(s)
Qts.
N/A
4. Replace Air Compressor Filter (if applicable)
N/A
5. Replace Power Steering Filter
Pts.
N/A
6. Replace Engine Air Cleaner Filter
N/A
7. Replace Coolant Filter (if applicable)
X
8. Test Starting and Charging System
Amps 105
Volts
15.2
JM
X
9. Lubricate Chassis and Body
Lbs.
1/2
RM
X
10.Air Conditioning If equipped, perform A/C system preventive maintenance
according to manufacturer recommendations and district procedure.
JM
F. ROAD TEST
âś“
1. Brake Performance - Park Brake, Stopping Distance and Equalization
âś“
2. Engine, Transmission and Driveline - Engine Performance, Governor and Shifting
âś“
3. Steering and Handling -Free Play, Power Assist, Column, Tracking and Turning Radius
Comments: Needs rear brakes soon
Tread Depth
Air Pressure
Tread Depth
Air Pressure
D.13. Excessive front tire wear
RRO
6/32
100 PSI
RF
1/32
50 PSI
RRI
6/32
100 PSI
LRI
6/32
100 PSI
LF
8/32
90 PSI
LRO
6/32
100 PSI
NOTE: Follow the manufacturer’s inspection and maintenance procedures for any equipment not noted on this form.
Inspector’s Signature:
Joe Mechanic
Inspector’s Printed Name:
Joe Mechanic
Shop Foreman or Supervisor’s Initials: BTT
Printed Name:
Bob the Technician
Bus Returned to Service Date: _10/7/2023_
Sample Repair Order
Vehicle Number
Mileage
Description of Vehicle
Repair Order #
Make
Year
Reg.
Lift
A/C
Date:
Organization Name:
School District
Safety Inspection
Yes ( ) No ( )
Route/Driver:
Inspected By:
Repairs Needed:
Out-of-service Date:
In Service Date:
Quantity
Parts
Est. Cost
Tech.
Init.
Repairs
Time
Hrs.
1/10
Cost Subtotal
Total Man-Hours
Quantity
Tires and Batteries
Filters
Mileage
Yes
No
Tune/Up-Front/Wheels-Oil
Mileage
Yes
No
Fuel/Oil
Tune-Up
Air
Frt. Wheels
Coolant
Oil Change
Trans
Total
Sample Repair Order,
Example
Vehicle Number
Mileage
Description of Vehicle
Repair Order #
23-1234
24-01
68,000
Make
IC/Thomas/ BB
Year
Reg.
X
Lift
A/C
X
Date:
08/20/2016
Organization Name:
MDE School District
Safety Inspection
Yes ( X ) No ( )
Route/Driver:
15/Petty Betty
Inspected By:
Joe Mechanic
Repairs Needed:
See inspection form dated 10/5/2023
Out-of-service Date:
10/5/2023
In Service Date:
10/7/2023
Quantity
Parts
Est. Cost
Tech.
Init.
Repairs
Time
Hrs.
1/10
1157 Bulb
67 RM
Replaced Bulb
0 1
187439CI oil filter
8 50 RM
Replaced Filter
0 1
LF 3949 oil filter
14 50 RM
Replaced Filter
0 1
1872526CI fuel filter
7 82 RM
Replaced Filter
0 1
PH79 fuel filter
5 32 RM
Replaced Filter
0 1
1875921CI fuel filter
4 90 RM
Replaced Filter
0 1
Quarts of Oil
11 40 RM
Changed Oil
0 2
1/2
Pounds of grease
1 50 RM
Lubricated Chassis
0 1
1.0
Labor, Mechanic
(@12/hr.)
12 00 JM
Inspection Adjustments and Repairs
1 0
1.3
Labor, Helper (@8.5/hr.)
11 05 RM
Inspection Adjustments and Repairs
0 1
1.0
Tire (see cost below)
RM
Change R/F Tire
0 3
Cost Subtotal
77 66
Total Man-Hours
2 3
Quantity
Tires and Batteries
Filters
Mileage
Yes
No
Tune/Up-Front/Wheels-Oil
Mileage
Yes
No
11Rx22.5 new tire
197 00 Fuel/Oil
68,000
X
Tune-Up
X
Air
X
Frt. Wheels
X
H20
X
Oil Change
68,000
X
Trans
Cost Total
274 66
PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
ELECTRIC SCHOOL BUS OUT OF SERVICE CRITERIA
PROCEDURES/SPECIFICATIONS:
1. New or existing school buses may be equipped with a Hybrid Electric Conversion System.
2. The system must be installed by a qualified manufacturer.
3. The system must not cause any difference in the operation of the bus.
4. A control panel will be installed in the driver’s area of the bus which will consist of:
a. On/Off switch
b. Switch must be labeled in drivers’ area
c. LED light capable of emitting a green and red color.
d. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI)
e. Standard instructions of what each LED light indications
5. The system must be mounted and properly secured to the existing frame of the bus.
6. The complete system is to be mounted underneath the bus.
7. The system will be encased in galvanized steel.
8. The steel case must be marked with a Flammable Decal.
9. Any wiring that is connected to the system MUST be wrapped/concealed in orange conduit.
Except the ground wire(s) that are connected to the frame.
10. The school bus is to be marked with the proper approved decals located on the front, back, and
both side of the bus indicating the bus is Electric.
11. Cooling module must have an operable fan and be cooled with antifreeze.
ORDER REPAIRED IF:
1. Not marked on the front, sides, and back indicating Electric Bus.
2. Any section of the driver shaft is not protected with a metal safety loop or if there is excessive
up and down movement at any universal joint.
3. Cables are color other than orange.
4. Chaffing of any wiring.
5. Steel encasing the system is not marked with a Flammable Decal.
6. Any violation the inspector deems a violation not listed
OUT OF SERVICE IF:
1. Not installed by qualified manufacturer, not secured to frame, not encased in galvanized steel.
2. System effects the operation of School Bus.
3. There is any defect which the inspector feels would adversely affect the ability of the vehicle to
stop safely.
TIRE CONDITION
LAP BELT CHART
LAP/SHOULDER BELT CHART
LAP BELT CHART
LAP/SHOULDER BELT CHART
LAP/SHOULDER BELT CHART